Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
P342, P343
Generator Protection Relays
Technical Guide
P34x/EN T/F33
MiCOM P342, P343 Guides
Generator Protection Relays
For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D – Energy,
Automation & Information for the relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050* and P343------0010*, P343------0020*,
P343------0030*, P343------0040*, P343------0050* are not supported by this
menu database, see TG8614A (0010), TG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN T/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN T/D22 (0060) for information on the
menu database for these software versions)
Technical Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Generator Protection Relays
Volume 1
Technical Guide P34x/EN T/F33
CONTENT
Issue Control
Safety Instructions
Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Front cover
Software version details amended to reflect latest relay
- - - software, on the back of the front cover
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
IT Throughout
new subdocument references
Password protection
Minor amendment made to Access level column of table
Last row of table : As level 1 plus: and Password 2
IT 3.4 11 required swapped around
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
AP Throughout
new subdocument references
Configuration column
16 1st row of table added
AP 2.1 16 - 17 Last 3 rows added to table
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
AP 2.5.1.1 40 1st paragraph after equations : last sentence added
Setting guidelines for under impedance function
AP 2.5.2.1 44 This title amended
Undervoltage protection function (27)
Paragraph before note : last 2 DDB signals on last line
45 changed
AP 2.6 46 K = Time Multiplier Setting equation amended
Overfrequency protection function
AP 2.9 52 Paragraph 5 : 3rd sentence added
Power factor element
AP 2.10.1.3 57 Paragraph 2 : Last sentence re-written
Negative phase sequence thermal protection
AP 2.11 59 Figure 18 : new diagram added
Reverse power protection function
1st paragraph after table : (“Power1 DO Timer/Power2
AP 2.12.3 67 DO Timer”) moved from 5th sentence to 3rd sentence
Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage
displacement protection function
Paragraph after Figure 21 : DDB signals changed in 2nd
AP 2.14 73 sentence
Overfluxing protection
AP 2.18 91 Paragraph 4 : DDB signal changed in 1st sentence
Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal
protection
95 1st paragraph after bullet points : last sentence re-written
AP 2.20 96 Last paragraph of section added
DDB output
AP 2.22.7.2 115 DDB signals in table changed
P34x/EN T/E33 Technical Guide
Issue Control
MiCOM P342, P343
Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
AP 2.24.2 122 Last row of 2nd table added
Breaker fail timer settings
Typical delay data in undercurrent elements row of table
AP 2.24.3.1 123 changed
Breaker fail undercurrent settings
AP 2.24.4 123 Paragraphs 3 and 4 added
Current loop inputs and outputs
AP 2.27 127 New section added
Current loop inputs
AP 2.27.1 127 - 129 New section added
Setting guidelines for current loop inputs
AP 2.27.2 129 - 130 New section added
Current loop outputs
AP 2.27.3 130 - 135 New section added
Setting guidelines for current loop outputs
AP 2.27.4 135 New section added
Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
145 Data in 1st table : deleted and changed
145 - 146 2nd table re-written
AP 3.5.1 146 Paragraphs after 2nd table : added
Setting guidelines
AP 3.5.2 146 New section added
Setting the Σ Ι^ thresholds
AP 3.5.2.1 146 New section added
Setting the number of operations thresholds
AP 3.5.2.2 146 - 147 New section added
Setting the operating time thresholds
AP 3.5.2.3 147 New section added
Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
AP 3.5.2.4 147 New section added
Relay alarm conditions
Data in table re-written
AP 3.7.3 154 Last paragraph of section : added
Control inputs
AP 3.11 164 Last paragraph of section : added
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
HW Throughout
new subdocument references
Output relay board
HW 2.4.2 9 Paragraph 1 : words two and six swapped around
Issue Control P34x/EN T/E33
Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Current loop input output board (CLIO)
HW 2.9 11 - 12 New section added
Platform software initialisation & monitoring
HW 4.1.3 18 Paragraph 1 : minor additions to 1st sentence
Continuous self-testing
Last bullet point : added
HW 4.2 19 Last paragraph : minor additions to 2nd sentence
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
TD Throughout
new subdocument references
Currents
TD 1.1 7 Data changed in 1st table
Voltages
TD 1.2 7 Data changed in 1st table
Output relay contacts
TD 1.6 8 Paragraph 1 : words two and six swapped around
Negative phase sequence thermal (46)
TD 10.18 38 Data in table amended
Pole slipping (78) {P343}
TD 10.22 40 Data in table amended
Thermal overload (49)
This title amended
TD 10.23 41 Data in table amended
Current loop input and outputs (CLIO)
TD 13.3 44 - 47 New section added
Accuracy
TD 13.3.1 47 New section added
Performance
TD 13.3.2 47 New section added
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
CT Throughout
new subdocument references
Relay menu database
GC - - Amended to reflect latest relay software
External connection diagrams
CO - - Additional diagrams added
Hardware/software version history and
compatibility
Presented in new layout and updated to reflect latest relay
VC - - software
P34x/EN T/E33 Technical Guide
Issue Control
MiCOM P342, P343
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately
apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits of AREVA T&D are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic
discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by
withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the
equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential
as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or
connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is
at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment
in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k – 10M ohms. If a
wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to
prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making
measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
AREVA T&D strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such
as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
CONTENT
1. SAFETY SECTION 3
1.1 Health and safety 3
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels 3
4. OLDER PRODUCTS 5
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6
1. SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the
equipment.
1.1 Health and safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in
a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THE PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
4. OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments
Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism
to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed
before making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments
The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any
mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock.
Draw out case relays
Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards.
Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs
When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before
insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
INTRODUCTION
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM 3
1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply
requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA
T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
− P range protection relays;
− C range control products;
− M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
− S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction
In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz
SER No Vx V
DIAG No Vn V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed ALARM
Hotkeys
function
LEDs OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
User programable
= CLEAR function LEDs
= READ
= ENTER
Keypad
Bottom
cover
Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port P0103ENb
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
− a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
− a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (/, 6, 8 and 2), an enter key
(5), a clear key (0), and a read key (1).
− 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
− the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
− battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
− a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the
relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.
− a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high
speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on
at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is
an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay.
Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.
A B C D E F
Power supply
connection
IRIG B
TX
PORT 1
Keypad/ IEC870-5-
Courier MODBUS DNP3.0
LCD 103
Display & modification of
• • •
all settings
Digital I/O signal status • • • • •
Display/extraction of
• • • • •
measurements
Display/extraction of fault
• • •
records
Extraction of disturbance
• • •
records
Programmable scheme
•
logic settings
Reset of fault & alarm
• • • • •
records
Clear event & fault records • • • •
Time synchronisation • • • •
Control commands • • • • •
Table 1
3.3 Menu structure
The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains
the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement
between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A
complete list of all of the menu settings is given in section P34x/EN GC/E33 of the
manual.
System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault Overcurrent Ground fault
Column
data
settings
P0106ena
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’ cell in the ‘System data’
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction
column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface,
that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front
panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front
panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently
for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact AREVA T&D
with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface
can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of
the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level 1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the
‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the menu (note
that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many
of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled
are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function
change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’ column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to
be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used
by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default values to all of the
relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have
been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.
The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33
changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.
Alarm messages
P0105ena
Alarms/Faults
Present
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in
Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column
heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting
data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only
possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the
default display press the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the
column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop
at the column heading. To move to the default display, the 8 key must be released
and pressed again.
3.6.3 Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter password
**** Level 1
Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown
above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.
Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move
between the character fields of the password, use the 4 and 6 keys. The password is
confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if
an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been
unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will
return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of
password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to.
To escape from this prompt press the clear key 0. Alternatively, the password can
be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key 0
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-
resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm
messages press the read key 1. When all alarms have been viewed, but not
cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the
latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of
this use the 1 key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press 0; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press 1. Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be
cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the
yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following
a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the 1 key, the 0 key can be pressed, this will move the display
straight to the fault record. Pressing 0 again will move straight to the alarm reset
prompt where pressing 0 once more will clear all alarms.
Update settings?
Enter or clear
Pressing 5 will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing 0 will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they
are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2
SK1
25 pin
download/monitor port
9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
P0107ena
This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the
relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
P0108ena
Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bits/s
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity),
1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has
been enabled will be revoked.
3.8 Rear communication port user interface
The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, MODBUS,
DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is
ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See section P34x/EN CO/E33 for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a
remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection,
and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for MODBUS, IEC 60870-
5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms
settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the
‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication
protocol being used by the rear port.
RS232 K-Bus
PC
KITZ protocol
converter
PC serial port
Modem
PC
Modem
Protocol
Courier
The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address
1
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-
line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of
the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this
action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 MODBUS communication
MODBUS is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by
supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. MODBUS
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be
used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with MODBUS communication, the relay’s communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In
the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’
column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using MODBUS which are described below. Move down the
‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
MODBUS
The next cell down controls the MODBUS address of the relay:
MODBUS address
23
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
MODBUS master station.
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication
The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5:
Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a
twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-
103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:
Remote address
162
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
Measure’t period
30.00 s
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be
set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The following cell is not currently used but is available for future expansion
Inactive timer
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33
Physical link
EIA(RS)485
The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional
fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre
optic’. This cell is also invisible if second rear comms port is fitted as it is mutually
exclusive with the fibre optic connectors.
The next cell down can be used for monitor or command blocking:
CS103 Blocking
There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
• Disabled - No blocking selected.
• Monitor Blocking - When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, reading of the
status information and disturbance records is not permitted.
When in this mode the relay returns a “Termination of
general interrogation” message to the master station.
• Command Blocking - When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, all remote
commands will be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting
group etc.). When in this mode the relay returns a “negative
acknowledgement of command” message to the master
station.
Protocol
DNP 3.0
The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay:
Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary
for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay
‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and
‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the
same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station.
The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0
master station.
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master
by the relay:
Time Synch
Enabled
The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP
3.0 master to synchronise the time.
3.9 Second rear communication port
For relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first
rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear
communications port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over
one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair
EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.
The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as
described in previous sections of P34x/EN IT/E33. Move down the settings until the
following sub heading is displayed.
The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2.
RP2 Protocol
Courier
The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g.
The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or
10-bit no parity.
The next cell down controls the comms port address.
RP2 Address
255
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate.
For K-Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ
interface at the end of the relay spur.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
POWER SUPPLY
EIA(RS)232
port 0
2nd RP (Courier)
CE
PO NT
WE RAL
R PR
SU OC
ESS
modem modem PPL
Y OR R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232 EIA232
EIA485
CK222
CK222
EIA485
Front port
EIA232
2nd RP (EIA485)
MiCOMS1
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd
rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access P2085ENA
EIA232
modem modem R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232
EIA485 CK222
EIA232
splitter 1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)
EIA232
15 a x
m
m
Front port
EIA232
2nd RP (EIA232)
MiCOMS1
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear P2086ENA
port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access
APPLICATION NOTES
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 11
1.1 Protection of generators 11
1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays 12
1.2.1 Protection features 13
1.2.2 Non-protection features 14
Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load shedding 51
Figure 17: Field failure protection characteristics 53
Figure 18: Negative phase sequence thermal characteristic 59
Figure 19: Effective coverage of stator earth fault protection 69
Figure 20: IDG characteristic 71
Figure 21: Alternative relay connections for residual overvoltage/NVD protection 73
Figure 22: Relay connections for biased REF protection 79
Figure 23: Biased REF protection operating characteristic 79
Figure 24: Neutral scaling for biased REF protection 80
Figure 25: Principle of high impedance differential protection 82
Figure 26: Relay connections for high impedance REF protection 82
Figure 27: Distribution of the 3rd harmonic component along the stator winding of a
large generator, (a) normal operation, (b) stator earth fault at the star point
(c), stator earth fault at the terminals 87
Figure 28: 100% Stator earth fault protection block diagram 88
Figure 29: Connection for 3rd harmonic undervoltage and overvoltage for 100% stator
earth fault protection 89
Figure 30: Fixed scheme logic for unintentional energisation of standstill protection 93
Figure 31: Connection for RTD thermal probes 95
Figure 32: Field failure protection function characteristics (small co-generator) 98
Figure 33: Simplified two machine system 101
Figure 34: Apparent impedance loci viewed at the generator terminal (point A) 102
Figure 35: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular characteristic 105
Figure 36: State machine 106
Figure 37: Regions and zones definition (generating mode) 107
Figure 39: Regions and zones definition (motoring mode) 110
Figure 40: Lenticular scheme characteristic 111
Figure 41: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular characteristic 113
Figure 42: Example system configuration 115
Figure 43: CB fail logic 124
Figure 44: Breaker flashover protection for directly connected machine 125
Figure 45: Breaker flashover protection for indirectly connected machine 125
Figure 46a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) 126
Figure 46b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) 127
Figure 47: Relationship between the transducer measuring quantity and the current
input range 128
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Figure 48: Relationship between the current output and the relay measurement 131
Figure 49: VTS logic 137
Figure 50: CT supervision function block diagram 140
Figure 51: CB state monitoring 143
Figure 52: Pole dead logic 144
Figure 53: TCS scheme 1 148
Figure 54: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3 149
Figure 55: TCS scheme 2 150
Figure 56: PSL for TCS scheme 2 151
Figure 57: TCS scheme 2 151
Figure 58: Trip LED logic diagram 166
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
1. INTRODUCTION
• Undervoltage
In addition various types of mechanical protection may be necessary, such as
vibration detection, lubricant and coolant monitoring, temperature detection etc.
The action required following response of an electrical or mechanical protection is
often categorised as follows:
• Urgent shutdown
• Non-urgent shutdown
• Alarm only
An urgent shutdown would be required, for example, if a phase to phase fault
occurred within the generator electrical connections. A non-urgent shutdown might
be sequential, where the prime mover may be shutdown prior to electrically
unloading the generator, in order to avoid over speed. A non-urgent shutdown may
be initiated in the case of continued unbalanced loading. In this case, it is desirable
that an alarm should be given before shutdown becomes necessary, in order to allow
for operator intervention to remedy the situation.
For urgent tripping, it may be desirable to electrically maintain the shutdown
condition with latching protection output contacts, which would require manual
resetting. For a non-urgent shutdown, it may be required that the output contacts are
self-reset, so that production of power can be re-started as soon as possible.
The P342/3 is able to maintain all protection functions in service over a wide range
of operating frequency due to its frequency tracking system (5-70 Hz). The P343
frequency tracking capability is of particular interest for pumped storage generation
schemes, where synchronous machines can be operated from a variable frequency
supply when in pumping mode. Additionally, in the case of combined cycle
generating plant, it may be necessary to excite and synchronise a steam turbine
generating set with a gas turbine set at low frequency, prior to running up to nominal
frequency and synchronising with the power system.
When the P342/3 protection functions are required to operate accurately at low
frequency, it will be necessary to use CTs with larger cores. In effect, the CT
requirements need to be multiplied by fn/f, where f is the minimum required
operating frequency and fn is the nominal operating frequency.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CT AND VT RATIOS
Main VT Primary 110V 100V 1000000V 1V
110V 80V 14V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Main VT Sec’y 400V 360V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Protected zone
Differential relay
P2157ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
GEN DIFF
Disabled, Biased,
GenDiff Function Biased N/A
High Impedance, Interturn
Gen Diff Ιs1 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Gen Diff k1 0 0 20% 5%
Gen Diff Ιs2 1.5 1.0 Ιn A 5.0 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A
Gen Diff k2 150 20% 150% 10%
Interturn Is_A 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn Is_B 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn Is_C 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn
0.1 s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
ITimeDelay
I1 I2
I DIFF
= I 1+ I 2
Operate
K2
Restrain
I s1 K1
I s2 I BIAS = I 1+ I 2
2
P2158ENa
Two bias settings are provided in the P343 relay. The initial bias slope,
“Gen Diff k1”, is applied for through currents upto “G en D iff Ιs2”. The second bias
slope, “Gen Diff k2”, is applied for through currents above the "Gen Diff Ιs2" setting.
The operating current of the biased differential element, for any value of through
current, can be calculated using the following formulae:
Ι1 + Ι2
ΙBIAS = 2
ΙDIFF > K2.ΙBIAS – (K2 – K1) Ιs2 + Ιs1 where ΙBIAS > Ιs2
I A2
I B2
I C2
MiCOM
IA P343
IB
IC
P2159ENa
These settings may be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the
protection.
2.3.3 High impedance differential protection
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme
where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 4.
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone
Zm
R CT1 R CT2
R L1 If R L3
R ST
Vs
R L2 R
R L4
To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault the CTs used
to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 2Vs.
The high impedance differential protection function uses the ΙA2, ΙB2, ΙC 2 current
inputs connected to measure the differential current in each phase, as shown in
Figure 5.
MiCOM
P343
NLR RST
I A2
I B2
I C2
P2161ENa
1 æ Ιop ö
Ιe < x
ç - Gen diff REF > Ιs1
÷
n ç CT ratio ÷
è ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
æ Ιop ö
Gen diff Ιs1 < ç
ç ÷
- nΙe ÷
è CT ratio ø
3. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay
operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Ιop = (CT ratio) x (Gen diff Ιs1 + nΙe)
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting (Gen Diff Ιs1) must be selected for the
high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the
stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting
is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting
(Gen Diff Ιs1).
Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf - Vk )
V = CΙ 0.25
where
V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” )
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” )
Ι = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” ).
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as
follows:
æ Vs (rms) x 2 ö 4
ç
Ι(rms) = 0.52 ç
÷
÷
è C ø
where
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“metrosil”) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“metrosil”), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) current should
be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms. for 1A
current transformers and approximately 100mA rms. for 5A current
transformers.
2. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher
relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V
rms., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending
on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms.
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the
following table:
I1
IL
IA2 IR
I2
IB2
IC2
P2073ENa
P2074ENb
Note, the biased differential protection in the P343 uses both sets of 3 phase current
inputs and so if the P343 differential protection was used for inter-turn protection no
other protection function in the P343 would be available. As normally differential
protection plus the many other protection functions in the P343 are required for the
generator protection in addition to the interturn protection it is advisable to use a
separate biased differential relay for the interturn protection in this application.
Another scheme that could be used on this type of generator is shown in Figure 9.
This arrangement is an attempt to get the benefits of inter-turn and differential
protection with a saving in CTs and relays. However, this arrangement is not as
sensitive as other schemes using separate inter-turn relays or differential relays. The
scheme in Figure 9 requires the neutral end CTs having half the turns ratio of the
terminal end CTs. The sensitivity of the protection for inter-turn faults is limited by the
fact that the two CT ratios applied must be selected in accordance with the generator
rated current. A P343 could be used for this application with the IA/IB/IC inputs
connected to the terminal side CTs as these see the full rated current. Note, the
IA/IB/IC inputs feed the current, impedance and power based protection. However,
in the case of a single generator feeding an isolated system, back-up protection
should use CTs at the neutral end of the machine to ensure internal faults on the
generator windings are detected. Thus, for this type of application it is advised that a
separate biased differential protection is used for the inter-turn protection. A P342
from separate CTs at the neutral end of the generator could then be used for the rest
of the protection.
Stator Windings A
B
C
Bias elements
P2069ENa
I P : 1A
Inter-turn
fault
87G
0.5xI P:1A
Note: Bias slope of differential protection must be low up to I flc to give inter-turn fault sensitivity.
P2070ENa
Fault 87G
CTs for
other
protection
functions
51N
Note: The inter-turn fault protection will also respond to some earth faults.
P2071ENa
draw zero sequence current through the delta winding of the transformer. Therefore,
no residual voltage will be produced from the voltage transformer and so no time
delay is required in this case for the trip element.
With this type of VT connection the zero sequence voltage from the VT is small for an
external fault. Also, the output from the star connected secondary winding of the VT
will not be able to correctly represent phase-ground voltages (for external faults), only
phase-phase voltages will remain accurate. Therefore, the sensitive directional earth
fault protection and CT supervision element, which use zero sequence voltage, may
not operate and so should be disabled. The under and over voltage protection can
be set as phase-to-phase measurement with this type of VT connection. The
underimpedance and the voltage dependent overcurrent use phase-phase voltages
anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be affected. The protection functions
which use phase-neutral voltages are the power, the loss of excitation and pole
slipping protection; all are for detecting abnormal generator operation under 3-
phase balanced conditions, therefore the accuracy of these protection functions
should not be affected.
If the neutral voltage displacement element is required for 95% stator earth fault
protection as well as interturn protection a separate VT connection at the terminals of
the generator or a distribution transformer at the generator earth is required to obtain
the correct zero sequence voltage. Note, the neutral voltage displacement protection
in the P342/3 relay can use the measured residual voltage from the Vn input or the
derived residual voltage from the 3 phase voltage inputs but not both. So, if the
derived residual voltage is used for interturn protection as shown in Figure 11, then
the measured residual voltage from a distribution transformer at the generator
neutral point can not be used for 95% stator earth fault protection using one relay.
See section 2.14 for more information on the P342/3 neutral voltage displacement
protection.
Voltage transformer
Vn VA VB VC
MiCOM P343
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
OVERCURRENT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse,
IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse,
Ι>1 Function Disabled UK LT Inverse, UK Rectifier, RI, IEEE M
Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Ι>1 Current Set 1 x Ιn A 0.08 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
Ι>1 Time Delay 1s 0 100 s 0.01 s
Ι>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
Ι>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
Ι>1 K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
Ι>1 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse N/A
Ι>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01s
Ι>2 Function DT Disabled or DT N/A
Ι>2 Current Set 0.08 x Ιn A 0.08 x Ιn A 10 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
Ι>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
For inverse time delayed characteristics, the following options are available. Note
that all IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
IEC Curves
æ K ö
ç + L÷
t =Txç
(Ι/Ιs) α - 1 ÷
è ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
IEEE Curves
æ K ö
t
ç
= TD x ç
+ L÷
(Ι/Ιs) α - 1 ÷
è ø
t = operation time
K = constant
Ι = measured current
Ιs = current threshold setting
α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier setting
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard
to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time
of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves.
Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but
the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the
previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the
“Ι>1 Time Dial” cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. The UK rectifier
curve is not required for generator protection applications but it is included for
consistency with other MiCOM products which use overcurrent protection.
Note, that the IEC/UK inverse characteristics can be used with a definite time reset
characteristic, however, the IEEE/US curves may have an inverse or definite time reset
characteristic. The following equation can be used to calculate the inverse reset time
for IEEE/US curves:
TD x S
tRESET = in seconds
(1 - M2)
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
where:
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
S = Constant
M = Ι / Ιs
2.4.1 RI curve
The RI curve (electromechanical) has been included in the first stage characteristic
setting options for Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault protections. The curve is
represented by the following equation:
æ 1 ö
ç ÷
t = K x ç 0.339 - æ0.236/ ö ÷ in seconds
è è Mø ø
With K adjustable from 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.05
M = Ι / Ιs
2.4.2 Application of timer hold facility
The first stage of overcurrent protection in the P340 relays are provided with a timer
hold facility.
Setting the hold timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset
instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting the
hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element
timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when
grading with electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time
delays. It will also enable the element to become sensitive to a pole slipping
condition where the element will cyclically operate as the machine slips successive
poles.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen for, this time delay is set via
the “Ι>1 tRESET” setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “Ι>1 Reset Char”. If definite time
(‘DT’) is selected the “Ι>1 tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay. If inverse
time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the inverse time operating
characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “Ι>1 Function”.
Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance
times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. When the reset time of the
overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to
trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will
integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Full load
current
0.25s 0.5s t
P2162ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
SYSTEM BACK-UP
Disabled, Voltage Controlled,
Voltage
Back-up Function Voltage Restrained,
Controlled
Under Impedance
Vector Rotation None None, Delta-Star N/A
DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,
IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, UK Rectifier, RI,
V Dep OC Char IEC S Inverse
IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E
Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
V Dep OC Ι> Set 1 x Ιn A 0.8 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
V Dep OC T Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
V Dep OC Reset DT DT or Inverse N/A
V Dep OC Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
V Dep OC TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
V Dep OC K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
V Dep OC tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
80V 5V 120V 1V
V Dep OC (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<1Set 320 V 80V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
60V 5V 120V 1V
V Dep OC (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<2Set 240V 80V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
For inverse time delayed characteristics refer to the phase overcurrent elements,
section 2.4.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
A single stage, non directional overcurrent element is provided. The element has a
time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time
(IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The element can be selectively enabled or disabled and
can be blocked via a relay input so that the element can be integrated into a blocked
overcurrent protection scheme.
The element can be fed from CTs at the terminal or neutral end of the generator.
If voltage dependant overcurrent operation is selected, the element can be set in one
of two modes, voltage controlled overcurrent or voltage restrained overcurrent.
2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
In this mode of operation, the under voltage detector is used to produce a step
change in the relay current setting (from “V Dep OC Ι> Set” to
“V Dep OC k Set” x “V Dep OC Ι> Set”), when voltage falls below the voltage
setting, “V Dep OC V>1 Set”. Under load conditions the relay can have a high
current setting greater than full load current. Under fault conditions the relay is
switched to a more sensitive setting leading to fast fault clearance. The operating
characteristic of the current setting when voltage controlled mode is selected is shown
in Figure 13.
Current
setting
I> Set
KI> Set
3En
Phase to phase fault: Ιf =
(2nRf)2 + (Xs + X2 + 2nXf)2
where
Ιf = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end fault
En 3 ((nRf)2 + (nXf)2)
Three-phase fault: Vø-ø =
(nRf)2 + (Xs + nXf)2
The current setting multiplier, “V Dep OC k Set”, must be set such that
“V Dep OC k Set” x “V Dep OC Ι Set” is less than Ιf as calculated above. The
voltage setting, “V Dep OC V<1 Set”, must be greater than. Vø-ø as calculated
above.
The voltage controlled overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as
described in section 2.5.1.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero delays
the resetting of the protection element timers for this period.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is set
via the “V Dep OC tRESET” setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “V Dep OC Reset Char”. If definite
time (‘DT’) is selected the “V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay,
as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the
inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “V
Dep OC Function”.
2.5.1.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
In voltage restrained mode the effective operating current of the protection element is
continuously variable as the applied voltage varies between two voltage thresholds,
“V Dep OC V<1 Set” and “V Dep OC V<2 Set”, as shown in Figure 14. In this
mode, it is quite difficult to determine the behaviour of the protection function during
a fault. This protection mode is, however, considered to be better suited to
applications where the generator is connected to the system via a generator
transformer. With indirect connection of the generator, a solid phase-phase fault on
the local busbar will result in only a partial phase-phase voltage collapse at the
generator terminals.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Current
setting
I> Set
KI> Set
æ V - Vs2 ö
For Vs2 < V < Vs1: Current setting (Ιs) =
ç
K.Ι> + ( Ι > - K. Ι> ) ç
÷
÷
è Vs1 - Vs2 ø
For V < Vs2: Current setting (Ιs) = K.Ι>
where:
Ι> = “V Dep OC Ι> Set”
Ιs = Current setting at voltage V
V = Voltage applied to relay element
Vs1 = “V Dep OC V<1 Set”
Vs2 = “V Dep OC V<2 Set”
2.5.1.3 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“Backup Function” to ‘Voltage Restrained’. The protection is disabled if
“Backup Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “V Dep OC Reset Char”. If definite
time (‘DT’) is selected the “V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay,
as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the
inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “V
Dep OC Function”.
2.5.2 Under impedance protection
When the element is set to under impedance mode the element operates with a time
delayed three phase non directional impedance characteristic, shown in Figure 15.
Trip
P2165ENa
The minimum phase current and the line voltage required for the P342/P343 under
impedance protection to work is 20mA and 2V (Ιn = 1A, Vn = 100/120V) and
100mA and 8V (Ιn = 5A, Vn = 380/480V). Note, that the under impedance consists
of separate three phase elements and the checking is done on a per phase basis, i.e.
the inhibition of one phase will not affect the other phases.
2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function
Under impedance protection can be selected by setting “Backup Function” to
‘Under Impedance’. The protection is disabled if “Backup Function” is set to
‘Disabled’. As phase-phase voltage is used in the measurement of impedance the
impedance settings should be increased by a factor of √3 to account for this.
The first stage impedance setting, “Z<1 Setting”, should be set to 70% of the
maximum load impedance. This gives an adequate margin for short time overloads,
voltage variation etc., whilst giving adequate back-up protection for generator,
generator-transformer and busbar faults.
æ Vph - n ö
ç
For example Z<1 = 3 x 0.7 x ç
÷
Ι x 1.2 ÷
è flc ø
allowing for a 20% overload of the generator full load current.
The second stage impedance setting “Z<2 Setting”, could be set to 50 – 60% of the
generator-transformer impedance. This stage can then be used to obtain faster
operation for faults closer to the generator.
The time delay, “Z<1 Time Delay” should allow co-ordination with downstream
overcurrent and distance protection devices and with the zone 2 underimpedance
protection. The time delay, “Z<2 Time Delay” should allow co-ordination with
generator and transfomer LV phase fault protection.
The under impedance protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as described in
section 2.5.1.1. Setting the hold timer, “Z< tRESET”, to a value other than zero,
delays the resetting of the protection element timer for this period.
A two stage undervoltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is
included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited during
periods when the machine is isolated from the external system.
Each stage of undervoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL, (DDB 158, DDB 159). DDB signals are also available to indicate
a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 579-586, Trips: DDB 453-460).
Note: If the undervoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation then the
DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2
Start/ Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip AB and V<1/2 Start/Trip BC
and V<1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phase-neutral then the DDB signals
V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2 Start/Trip C/CA
refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip A and V<1/2 Start/Trip B and V<1/2
Start/Trip C.
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x”
cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Undervoltage Sub Heading
V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V< Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V<1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
80V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<1 Voltage Set
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (1 – M)
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (V<1 TMS)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Voltage /Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set)
2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation), ‘DT’
(for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the “V<1 Function” cell.
Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the “V<2 Status” cell. The
time delay (“V<1 TMS” - for IDMT curve; “V<1 Time Delay”, “V<2 Time Delay” - for
definite time) should be adjusted accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-
neutral voltage as selected by “V< Measur’t Mode”. Single or three phase operation
can be selected in “V<1 Operate Mode”. When ‘Any Phase’ is selected, the element
will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when ‘Three Phase’ is selected
the element will operate when all three phase voltages are below the setting.
If the undervoltage protection function is to be used for back-up protection, the
voltage setting, ”V<1 Voltage Set”, should be set above the steady-state phase-phase
voltage seen by the relay for a three-phase fault at the remote end of any feeder
connected to the generator bus. Allowances should be made for the fault current
contribution of parallel generators, which will tend to keep the generator voltage up.
If the element is set to operate from phase to phase voltages operation for earth
faults can be minimised, i.e. set “V< Measur’t Mode” to ‘Phase-Phase’. To allow
detection of any phase to phase fault, “V< Operate Mode” should be set to ‘Any-
Phase’. Equations for determining the phase-phase voltage seen by the relay under
such circumstances are given in section 2.5.1.2.
The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set
“V<1 Function” to ‘DT’. The time delay, “V<1 Time Delay”, should be set to co-
ordinate with downstream protections and the System Back-up protection of the relay,
if enabled. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent unwanted
operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips. These may occur
during clearance of faults further into the power system or by starting of local
machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of 3s-5s.
The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual voltage
conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the machine is
being operated with the AVR selected to manual control.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the
generator “poledead” logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting “V
Poledead Inh” to ‘Enabled’. This will ensure that when a poledead condition is
detected (i.e. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as
determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the undervoltage element will be
inhibited.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Overvoltage Sub Heading
V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V> Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
150V 60V 185V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V>1 Voltage Set
600V 240V 740V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
V>1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
V>2 Status DT Disabled DT
130V 60V 185V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V>2 Voltage Set
520V 240V 740V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (M - 1)
where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“V>1 TMS”)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (“V>1 Voltage Set”)
2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation),
‘DT’ (for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the “V>1 Function”
cell. Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in
the “V>2 Status” cell. The time delay (“V>1 TMS” - for IDMT curve;
“V>1 Time Delay”, “V>2 Time Delay” - for definite time) should be selected
accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or Phase-
Neutral voltage as selected by “V> Measur’t Mode” cell. Single or three phase
operation can be selected in “V> Operate Mode” cell. When ‘Any Phase’ is selected
the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when ‘Three Phase’
is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are above the
setting.
Generators can typically withstand a 5% overvoltage condition continuously.
The withstand times for higher overvoltages should be declared by the generator
manufacturer.
To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the phase-
phase voltages, to achieve this “V>1 Measur’t Mode” can be set to ‘Phase-Phase’
with “V>1 Operating Mode” set to ‘Three-Phase’. The overvoltage threshold, “V>1
Voltage Set”, should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal phase-phase
voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, “V>1 Time Delay”, should be set to
prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed overvoltage protection function due to
transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; e.g. following
load rejection where correct AVR/Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be
applied would be 1s-3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower voltage
threshold settings.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage
protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, “V>2 Voltage Set”, would be
130-150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending on
plant manufacturers’ advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay,
“V>2 Time Delay”, should be set to 0s.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
If phase to neutral operation is selected, care must be taken to ensure that the
element will grade with downstream protections during earth faults, where the phase-
neutral voltage can rise significantly.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Under frequency Sub Heading
F<1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F<1 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F<2 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<2 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<3 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<3 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<3 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<4 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<4 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<4 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
Bit 0 - Enable Block F<1 during Poledead
Bit 1 - Enable Block F<2 during Poledead
F< Function Link 1111
Bit 2 - Enable Block F<3 during Poledead
Bit 3 - Enable Block F<4 during Poledead
Frequency
fn
A
F1<
F2<
t2 t1 Time
C Optimum underfrequency
protection characteristic P2047ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Overfrequency Sub Heading
F>1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>1 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 68 Hz 0.01 Hz
F>1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F>2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 68 Hz 0.01 Hz
F>2 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
X
Normal machine operating impedance
R
Xa2 Xa1
Alarm angle
Xb2 Xb1
P2167ENa
element in the field failure protection which can operate when the generator is
running in this condition.
Cylindrical rotor machines have a much lower output capability when operating as
an induction generator under excitation failure conditions. They are more likely to be
pushed over the peak torque level of their induction generator speed-torque
characteristic. If the peak induction generator torque level is exceeded, a machine
can stabilise at a much higher level of slip (perhaps 5% above synchronous speed).
When this happens, the machine will draw a very high reactive current from the
power system and a stator winding current as high as 2.0 p.u. may be reached. The
slip-frequency rotor currents could lead to rotor core or winding damage if the
condition is sustained.
Operation as an induction generator under field failure conditions relies upon the
ability of the rest of the system being able to supply the required reactive power to the
machine. If the system cannot supply enough reactive power the system voltage will
drop and the system may become unstable. This could occur if a large generator
running at high power suffers a loss of field when connected to a relatively weak
system. To ensure fast tripping under this condition one of the impedance elements
can be used with a short time delay. This can trip the machine quickly to preserve
system stability. This element should have a small diameter to prevent tripping under
power swinging conditions. The second impedance element, set with a larger
diameter, can provide detection of field failure under lightly loaded conditions. This
second element should be time delayed to prevent operation during power swing
conditions.
The Field Failure protection impedance elements are also provided with an adjustable
delay on reset (delayed drop off) timer. This time delay can be set to avoid delayed
tripping that may arise as a result of cyclic operation of the impedance measuring
element, during the period of pole slipping following loss of excitation. Some care
would need to be exercised in setting this timer, since it could make the Field Failure
protection function more likely to give an unwanted trip in the case of stable power
swinging. The impedance element trip time delay should therefore be increased
when setting the reset time delay.
The delay on reset timer might also be set to allow the field failure protection function
to be used for detecting pole slipping of the generator when excitation is not fully lost;
e.g. following time-delayed clearance of a nearby power system fault. This subject is
discussed in more detail in section 2.21.
DDB signals are available to indicate the start and tripping of each stage (Starts:
DDB 637, DDB 638, Trips: DDB 422, DDB 423). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION
TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the field failure elements are shown in the following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status Disabled Disabled Enabled
FFail Alm Angle 15° 15° 75° 1°
FFail Alm Delays 5s 0s 100s 0.1s
FFail1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
FIELD FAILURE
20/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 40/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail1 –Xa1
80/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 160/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
220/Ιn Ω 25/Ιn Ω 325/Ιn Ω 1/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail1 Xb1
880/Ιn Ω 100/Ιn Ω 1300/Ιn Ω 4/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
kV2
FFail2 Xb2 =
MVA
The angle setting, “FFail Alm Angle”, should be set to greater than any angle that the
machine could be operated at in normal running. A typical setting would be 15°,
equivalent to a power factor of 0.96 leading. The power factor element time delay,
“FFail Alm Delay”, should be set longer than the impedance element time delay
setting (“FFail1 Time Delay”). This is to prevent operation of the alarm element under
transient conditions such as power swinging and to provide discrimination where a
field failure condition may not be detected by conventional field failure impedance
elements.
Ιa + a2 Ιb + aΙc
Ι2 = where a = 1.0 ∠120°
3
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current
components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, non-
linear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive
asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission
systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching
devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a
reverse-rotating component of stator flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous
speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the
rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper
windings etc.
Where a machine has a high continuous negative phase sequence current withstand
level (Ι2 amp), as in the case of typical salient-pole machines, it would not be
essential to enable the NPS protection function. The NPS protection function can,
however, offer a better method of responding to an uncleared asymmetric fault
remote from the generator bus. As mentioned in section 2.5.1.2, it may be difficult to
set the voltage dependant overcurrent protection function to detect a remote fault and
co-ordinate with feeder backup protection for a close-up 3-phase fault.
For high levels of negative phase sequence current, eddy current heating can be
considerably in excess of the heat dissipation rate. Thus, virtually all the heat
acquired during the period of unbalance will be retained within the rotor. With this
assumption, the temperature attained within any critical rotor component will be
dependent on the duration of the unbalance (t seconds) and the level of NPS current
(I2 per unit) and is proportional to I22t. Synchronous generators are assigned a per-
unit I22t thermal capacity constant (Kg) to define their short time NPS current withstand
ability, see column 3 in Table 1. Various rotor components have different short time
thermal capacities and the most critical (lowest value of I22t) should form the basis of
the generator manufacturer’s short time I22t withstand claim.
Many traditional forms of generator NPS thermal protection relays have been
designed with an extremely inverse (Ι22t) operating time characteristic. Where the
operating time of the characteristic is dependent solely on the instantaneous
magnitude of negative phase sequence current present. This characteristic would be
set to match the claimed generator thermal capacity. This is satisfactory when
considering the effects of high values of negative phase sequence current.
For intermediate levels of NPS current, the rate of heating is slower. As a result, heat
dissipation should be considered.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
The basic expression of t = K/Ι2cmr does not cater for the effects of heat dissipation or
for low standing levels of negative phase sequence current. The latter resulting in an
increase in rotor temperature which remains within the machines design limits. An
existing, tolerable, level of negative phase sequence current (Ι2<Ι2cmr), has the effect
of reducing the time to reach the critical temperature level, if the negative phase
sequence current level should increase beyond Ι2cmr. The P340 NPS thermal replica is
designed to overcome these problems by modelling the effects of low standing levels
of negative phase sequence currents.
The temperature rise in critical rotor components is related to the negative phase
sequence current (I2 per unit) and to time (t seconds) as follows. This assumes no
preceding negative phase sequence current:
θ°C ∝ I22 (1 - e-t/τ)
where
τ = the thermal time constant, τ = Kg/I2CMR2
Kg is the generator’s per-unit thermal capacity constant in seconds.
I2CMR is the generator’s per-unit continuous maximum I2 rating.
The limiting continuous maximum temperature (θCMR) would be reached according to
the following current-time relationship:
θ°C = θCMR Þ I22 (1 - e-t/τ) = I2CMR2
From the above, the time for which a level of negative phase sequence current in
excess of I2CMR can be maintained is expressed as follows:
t = - (Kg/I2CMR2) loge (1- (I2CMR/I2))
The P340 negative phase sequence element offers a true thermal characteristic
according to the following formula:
sequence protection trip time setting is provided. This maximum time setting also
limits the tripping time of the negative phase sequence protection for levels of
unbalance where there may be uncertainty about the machine’s thermal withstand.
A time delayed negative sequence overcurrent alarm stage is provided to give the
operator early warning of an unbalanced condition that may lead to generator
tripping. This can allow corrective action to be taken to reduce the unbalance in the
load.
The Negative Sequence element uses the current measured at the ΙA, ΙB, ΙC inputs on
the relay.
Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the “NPS Thermal” cell in the
“MEASUREMENTS 3” column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting ‘Yes’ in the
“Reset NPS Thermal” cell in “Measurements 3”. Alternatively the thermal state can be
reset by energising DDB 389 “Reset Ι2 Thermal” via the relay PSL.
A DDB signal is also available to indicate tripping of the element (DDB 424). A
further DDB ‘NPS Alarm’ signal is generated from the NPS thermal alarm stage (DDB
306). The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be viewed in the
“Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
I 2>2 tMAX
I 2>2 k Setting
I 2>2 tMIN
P2247ENa
Setting ranges for the negative phase sequence thermal element are shown in the
following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
NPS THERMAL
Ι2>1 Alarm Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Ι2>1 Current Set 0.05 Ιn A 0.03 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Ι2>1 Time Delay 20 s 2s 60 s 0.1 s
Ι2>2 Trip Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Ι2>2 Current set 0.1 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Ι2>2 k Setting 15 2 40 0.1
Ι2>2 kRESET 15 2 40 0.1
Ι2>2 tMAX 1000 s 500 s 2000 s 10 s
Ι2>2 tMIN 0.25 s 0.25 s 40 s 0.25 s
æ Ιflc ö
ç
Ι2 > 2 Current set = Ι2cmr x ç
÷ x Ιn
Ι ÷
è p ø
2
æ Ιflc ö
ç
Ι2 > 2 k Setting = Kg x ç
÷
Ι ÷
è p ø
where
Ι2cmr = Generator per unit Ι2 maximum withstand.
Kg = Generator thermal capacity constant(s), see Table 1 for guidance.
To aid grading with downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for the
operating characteristic can be set, “Ι2>2 tMIN”. This definite minimum time setting
should be set to provide an adequate margin between the operation of the negative
phase sequence thermal protection function and external protection. The co-
ordination time margin used should be in accordance with the usual practice adopted
by the customer for back-up protection co-ordination.
A maximum operating time for the negative phase sequence thermal characteristic
may be set, “Ι2>2 tMAX”. This definite time setting can be used to ensure that the
thermal rating of the machine is never exceeded.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Power
Operating Mode Generating Generating, Motoring
Power1 Function Reverse Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
–P>1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P<1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Power
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P>1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P<2 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P>2 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Sensitive Power
Comp Angle 0° -5° 5° 0.1°
Operating Mode Generating Generating, Motoring
Sen Power1 Func Reverse Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen –P>1 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Sensitive Power
Power1 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
P1 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Sen Power2 Func Low Forward Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen –P>2 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
the low forward power enabled and correctly set and the protection operating mode
set to Motoring.
2.12.2.1Low forward power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a low forward power
stage by selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen
Power 2 Func” cell to ‘Low Forward’.
When required for interlocking of non urgent tripping applications, the threshold
setting of the low forward power protection function, “P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting”
or “P<2 Setting/Sen P<2 Setting”, should be less than 50% of the power level that
could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical loading. The
generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the protected
machine. The operating mode should be set to “Generating” for this application.
When required for loss of load applications, the threshold setting of the low forward
power protection function, “P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting” or “P<2 Setting/Sen P<2
Setting”, is system dependent, however, it is typically set to 10-20% below the
minimum load. For example, for a minimum load of 70%Pn, the setting needs to be
set at 63%-56%Pn. The operating mode should be set to “Motoring” for this
application.
For interlocking non urgent trip applications the time delay associated with the low
forward power protection function, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or
“Power2 TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay”, could be set to zero. However, some delay
is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in the event
of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle closure. A typical time
delay for this reason is 2s.
For loss of load applications the pick up time delay, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1
Delay” or “Power2 TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay”, is application dependent but is
normally set in excess of the time between motor starting and the load being
established. Where rated power can not be reached during starting (for example
where the motor is started with no load connected) and the required protection
operating time is less than the time for load to be established then it will be necessary
to inhibit the power protection during this period. This can be done in the PSL using
AND logic and a pulse timer triggered from the motor starting to block the power
protection for the required time.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero when selected to operate low forward power elements.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection element
can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via ‘poledead’ logic. This is
controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, “P1 Poledead Inh” or “P2
Poledead Inh”, to ‘Enabled’.
2.12.3 Reverse power protection function
A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system in normal
operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is connected in
parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to ‘motor’. This reversal of
power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the reverse power element.
The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the
power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types of
generating plant are given in the following table.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Possible Damage
Prime Mover Motoring Power
(Percentage Rating)
Risk of fire or explosion from
Diesel Engine 5% – 25%
unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness.
Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage.
10% – 15%
(Split-shaft) With some gear-driven sets,
Gas Turbine damage may arise due to reverse
>50% torque on gear teeth.
(Single-shaft)
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power
compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power
loss or damage.
0.2 – >2%
(Blades out of water) Blade and runner cavitation may
Hydraulic Turbines occur with a long period of
>2.0% motoring
(Blades in water)
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow
detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive. Automatic
disconnection is recommended for unattended operation.
Table showing motor power and possible damage for various types of prime mover.
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure
may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic
initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an
adjustable reset time delay is provided (“Power1 DO Timer/Power2 DO Timer”). This
delay would need to be set longer than the period for which the reverse power could
fall below the power setting (“P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting”). This setting needs to be
taken into account when setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that
a delay on reset in excess of half the period of any system power swings could result
in operation of the reverse power protection during swings.
Reverse power protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the generator
set circuit breaker for ‘non-urgent’ tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1. Reverse power
interlocks are preferred over low forward power interlocks by some utilities.
2.12.3.1Reverse power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a reverse power stage
by selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen
Power2 Func” cell to ‘Reverse’.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
The power threshold setting of the reverse power protection, “-P>1 Setting/Sen -P>1
Setting” or “-P>2 Setting/Sen -P>2 Setting”, should be less than 50% of the motoring
power, typical values for the level of reverse power for generators are given in
previous table.
For applications to detect the loss of the prime mover or for applications to provide
interlocking of non urgent trips the reverse power protection operating mode should
be set to “Generating”.
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or
alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation.
A time delay setting, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or “Power2
TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay” of 5s should be applied typically.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset
time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that
false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event.
2.12.4 Over power protection
The overpower protection can be used as overload indication, as a back-up
protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above the
maximum power rating of the machine.
2.12.4.1Over power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an over power stage by
selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen Power2
Func” cell to ‘Over’.
The power threshold setting of the over power protection, “P>1 Setting/Sen P>1
Setting” or “P>2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting”, should be set greater than the machine
full load rated power.
A time delay setting, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or “Power2
TimeDelay/Sens Power2 Delay” should be applied.
The operating mode should be set to “Motoring” or “Generating” depending on the
operating mode of the machine.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero.
The percentage of winding covered by the earth fault protection can be calculated as
shown below, with reference to Figure 19.
x
If
Is
R If = xV/R
x min = Is R/V
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V
Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, RI,
ΙN>1 Function Disabled IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse,
IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse,
US ST Inverse, IDG
ΙN>1 Current 0.1 x Ιn A 0.02 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
ΙN1>1 IDG Ιs 1.5 1 4 0.1
ΙN>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
ΙN>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
ΙN>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
ΙN>1 K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
ΙN>1 IDG Time 1.2 1 2 0.01
ΙN>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse N/A
ΙN>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
ΙN>2 Function DT Disabled, DT N/A
ΙN>2 Current Set 0.45 x Ιn A 0.02 x Ιn A 10 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
ΙN>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent
Protection, section 2.4.
2.13.1 IDG curve
The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed earth fault protection in the
Swedish market. This curve is available in stages 1 and 2 of Earth Fault protection.
The IDG curve is represented by the following equation:
æ Ι ö
t = 5.8 - 1.35 loge ç ÷ in seconds
è ΙN > Setting ø
where
Ι = measured current
ΙN>Setting = an adjustable setting which defines the start point of the characteristic
Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the “ΙN>” setting, the
actual relay current threshold is a different setting called “IDG Ιs”. The “IDG Ιs”
setting is set as a multiple of “ΙN>”.
An additional setting “IDG Time” is also used to set the minimum operating time at
high levels of fault current.
Figure 20 illustrates how the IDG characteristic is implemented.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
10
3
IDG Time Setting Range
2
0
1 10 100
I/IN>
P2242ENa
1
3
Va
Vb
Vc
Vn
1 Derived from phase neutral voltages MiCOM
2 Measured from earth impedance P343
3 Measured from broken delta VT
P2169ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input Measured Measured, Derived
VN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
1V 80V 1V
5V (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
VN>1 Voltage Set
20V (Vn=380/480V) 4V 320V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
1V 80V 1V
5V (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
VN>2 Voltage Set
20V (Vn=380/480V) 4V 320V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (M – 1)
where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“VN>1 TMS”)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Residual Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (“VN>1 Voltage Set”)
2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (inverse time operating characteristic), ‘DT’
(definite time operating characteristic) or ‘Disabled’, within the “VN>1 Function” cell.
Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the
“VN>2 Status” cell. The time delay. (“VN>1 TMS” - for IDMT curve;
“V>1 Time Delay”, “V>2 Time Delay”- for definite time) should be selected in
accordance with normal relay co-ordination procedures to ensure correct
discrimination for system faults.
The residual overvoltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage measured
at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the phase-neutral
voltage inputs as selected by “VN Input”.
For a directly connected machine the neutral voltage displacement protection must
co-ordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. To ensure co-ordination the
voltage setting of the neutral voltage displacement protection function should be set
higher than the effective setting of current operated earth fault protection in the same
earth fault zone. The effective voltage setting of a current operated earth fault
protection may be established from the following equations:
where
Veff = effective voltage setting of current operated protection
Ιpoc = primary operating current of current operated protection
Ze = earthing impedance
V1/ = VT turns ratio
V2
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any
standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for
residual overvoltage protection is 5V.
The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or very
high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an
appreciable time under an earth fault condition.
Where the generator is connected to the system via a transformer, co-ordination with
system earth fault protections is not required. In these applications the NVD voltage
setting should typically be set to 5% of rated voltage. This will provide protection for
95% of the stator winding.
enabled only during genuine earth fault conditions when significant residual voltage
will be present. To prevent the element from mal-operating due to VT fuse failure the
element can be blocked from the VT supervision logic by setting the ISEF Func Link -
Block ISEF from VTS to 1. If the ISEF Func Link is set to 0 the SEF element will revert
to non directional upon operation of the VTS.
Where Petersen Coil earthing is used, users may wish to use Wattmetric Directional
Earth Fault protection or an Ιcosφ characteristic. Settings to enable the element to
operate as a wattmetric element are also provided. For insulated earth applications,
it is common to use the Ιsinφ characteristic. See the P140 technical guide
P14x/EN T/A22, section 2.6 for more details on the application of directional earth
fault protection on insulated and Petersen coil systems.
The Sensitive Earth Fault protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL (DDB 362). This allows the protection to be integrated into busbar
protection schemes as shown in section 2.24, or can be used to improve grading with
downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of
the protection, (Start: DDB 617, Trips: DDB 447). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the
“COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Sensitive Earth Fault element are shown in the following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROTECTION
SEF, SEF Cos (PHI), SEF Sin (PHI), Wattmetric,
SEF/REF Options SEF Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF, Lo Z REF + SEF,
Lo Z REF + Watt
ΙSEF>1 Function DT Disabled, DT
Non- Non-Directional, Directional Fwd,
ΙSEF>1 Directional
Directional Directional Rev
ΙSEF>1 Current 0.05 Ιn A 0.005 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A 0.00025 Ιn A
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent
Protection, section 2.4.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
terminal fault. On larger machines, typically >2MW, where phase CTs can be fitted
to both neutral end and terminal ends of the stator winding, phase differential
protection may be fitted. For small machines, however, only one set of phase CTs
may be available making phase differential protection impractical. For smaller
generators earth fault differential protection can be applied to provide instantaneous
tripping for any stator or terminal earth fault. In application the operating zone of
earth fault differential protection is restricted to faults within the boundaries of the CTs
supplying the relay, hence this type of element is referred to as restricted earth fault
protection.
When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must be
employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, thus ensuring
that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding/connections.
Two methods are commonly used; percentage bias or high impedance. The biasing
technique operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the
relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay
circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may
occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current
through the relay.
The REF protection in the P340 relays may be configured to operate as either a high
impedance differential or a low impedance biased differential element. The following
sections describe the application of the relay in each mode.
Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as
the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
A DDB signals are also available to indicate the tripping of the REF protection, (DDB
446). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor
Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
The REF settings can be found in the ‘SEF/REF PROT’N’ column and are shown
below:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF,
SEF/REF Options SEF
Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt
REF PROTECTION Sub Heading
ΙREF> k1 20% 0 20% 1%
ΙREF> k2 150% 0 150% 1%
ΙREF> Ιs1 0.2 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 1 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
ΙREF> Ιs2 1 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A 1.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
ΙREF> Ιs 0.2 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 1 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
differential current can be produced. However, biasing will increase the relay setting
such that the resulting differential current is insufficient to cause operation of the
relay.
Figures 22 and 23 show the appropriate relay connections and operating
characteristic for the P340 relay applied for biased REF protection, respectively:
Ia
Ib
Ic
In
MiCOM
P343
P2170ENa
I DIFF
Operate
k2
Restrain
IS1 k1
I S2 I BIAS
P2171ENa
As can be seen in Figure 22, the three line CTs are connected to the three phase CTs
in the normal manner. The neutral CT is then connected to the stator earth fault CT
input. These currents are then used internally to derive both a bias and a differential
current quantity for use by the low impedance biased differential REF protection.
The advantage of this method of connection is that the line and neutral CTs are not
differentially connected and so the neutral CT can also be used to drive the stator
earth fault protection. Also, no external equipment such as stabilising resistors or
metrosils are required, unlike the case with high impedance protection.
The formula used by the relay to calculate the required bias quantity is therefore as
follows:
Ιbias = {(Highest of Ιa, Ιb or Ιc) + (Ιneutral x Scaling Factor)} / 2
The reason for the scaling factor included on the neutral current is explained by
referring to Figure 24:
Neutral CT ratio
200/1
IA
IB
IC
IN
MiCOM
IBIAS = (highest of IA , IB , IC ) + ( I N x scaling factor) P343
2
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone
Zm
R CT1 R CT2
R L1 If R L3
R ST
Vs
R L2 R
R L4
NLR RST
MiCOM
P343
I SEF
P2174ENa
The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 26:
As can be seen from Figure 26, the high impedance protection uses an external
differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then
connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series.
2.16.2.1Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection
From the “Sens E/F Options” cell, ‘Hi Z REF’ must be selected to enable High
Impedance REF protection. The only setting cell then visible is “ΙREF> Ιs”, which may
be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be
set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level
for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly
earthed system.
The primary operating current (Ιop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio,
the relay operating current (“ΙREF> Ιs”), the number of current transformers in
parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current
transformer (Ιe) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in
three ways:
1. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve
a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.
1æ Ιop ö
Ιe < x
ç - Gen diff REF > Ιs1
÷
n ç CT ratio ÷
è ø
2. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary
operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
æ Ιop ö
ç
ΙREF Ιs1 < ç
÷
- nΙe ÷
è CT ratio ø
3. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay
operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Ιop = (CT ratio) x (ΙREF > Ιs1 + nΙe)
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting “ΙREF> Ιs” must be selected for the high
impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the stabilising
resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a
function of the required stability voltage setting (VS) and the relay current setting
“ΙREF> Ιs”.
Vp = 2 2 Vk ( Vf - Vk )
æ Vs (rms) x 2 ö 4
Ι(rms) = 0.52 ç
ç ÷
÷
è C ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
where
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“metrosil”) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“metrosil”), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) current should be
as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current
transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformers.
2. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay
voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 500V rms,
so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending
on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the
following table:
Nominal
Relay Voltage Recommended Metrosil Type
Characteristic
Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
a) UTE
G
UTE
N T 0
N T
50% 100%
UNE m
UNE
b) UTE
G
UTE
N T 0 T
N
50% 100%
m
c)
G 0 50% 100%
N T N
UNE
m
UNE
P2175ENa
Figure 27: Distribution of the 3rd harmonic component along the stator
winding of a large generator, (a) normal operation, (b) stator
earth fault at the star point (c), stator earth fault at the
terminals
m = relative number of turns
To detect faults in the last 5% of the generator winding, the P343 relay is provided
with a third harmonic undervoltage and overvoltage element. These, together with
the residual overvoltage or stator earth fault protection elements, will provide
protection for faults over the complete winding.
The third harmonic neutral under voltage element is applicable when the neutral
voltage measurement is available at the neutral end of the generator. It is supervised
by a three-phase under voltage element, which inhibits the protection when all the
phase-phase voltages at the generator terminal are below the threshold, to prevent
operation when the machine is dead. Interlocking may also be required to prevent
false operation during certain conditions. For example, some machines do not
produce substantial third harmonic voltage until they are loaded. In this case, the
power supervision elements (active, reactive and apparent power) could be used to
detect load to prevent false tripping under no load conditions. These power
thresholds can be individually enabled and disabled and the setting range is from 2-
100%Pn.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
For applications where the neutral voltage measurement can only be obtained at the
generator terminals, from a broken delta VT for example, the under voltage
technique cannot be applied. Therefore, the third harmonic neutral over voltage
element can be used for this application. The blocking features of the under voltage
and power elements are not required for the 3rd harmonic neutral over voltage
element.
Note: The relay can only select 3rd harmonic neutral under voltage or
3rd harmonic neutral over voltage, but not both.
The logic diagrams of the two protection schemes are shown in Figure 28.
Vab<
Vca<
P 3ph <
Q 3ph <
S 3ph <
Note: 3Ph W, 3ph VAR and 3ph VA inhibits can be individually disabled.
P1253ENa
The 3rd harmonic undervoltage element operates from the same input as the neutral
voltage displacement protection and must be supplied from a VT connected in the
generator earth connection as shown in Figure 29. The 3rd harmonic overvoltage
element operates from the neutral voltage measurement at the generator terminals,
via an open-delta VT, for example as shown in Figure 29.
For applications where parallel machines are directly connected to the busbars
discrimination of an earth fault between the machines usually can not be achieved.
For applications where machines are connected to the busbars via a delta/star
transformer the delta winding blocks the 3rd harmonic currents from other machines
so correct discrimination can be achieved for earth faults.
2
Va
Vb
Vc
Vn
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: 100% EF
Disabled, VN3H< Enabled,
100% St EF Status Enabled
VN3H> Enabled
1V 0.3V 20V 0.1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
100% St EF VN3H<
4V 1.2V 80V 0.4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
The terminal voltage interlock threshold, used to prevent operation of the element
when the machine is not running, “100% St EF V<Inh”, should typically be set to 80%
of machine rated voltage.
The power interlock thresholds, used to prevent operation of the element until there is
sufficient load current, “P<Inhibit set, Q<Inhibit set, S<Inhibit”, should be enabled if
required to prevent operation under no load conditions. One or more of the
thresholds can be used as an interlock. They should be set during commissioning by
increasing the load current until the 3rd harmonic undervoltage element is reset and
setting the power thresholds above the measured power values. The power values
can be determined by viewing the “3 phase Watts, 3 phase VArs, 3 phase VA” cells
in the “MEASUREMENTS 2” menu.
Note: Other earth fault protection (residual overvoltage or current
operated stator earth fault protection) must also be enabled to
provide coverage for earth faults across the complete stator
winding.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1: VOLTS/HZ
V/f Alarm Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
2.31 V/Hz 1.5 V/Hz 3.5 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V/f Alarm Set
9.24 V/Hz 6 V/Hz 14 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
0.18 * TMS
t = 0.8 +
(M - 1)2
V/f
Where M =
( V/f Trip Setting )
V = measured voltage
F = measured frequency
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection
The overfluxing protection element trip stage can be selected by setting the “V/f Trip
Func” cell to the required time delay characteristic; ‘DT’ for definite time operation,
‘IDMT’, for inverse time operation. The overfluxing protection trip stage is disabled if
“V/f Trip Func” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The overfluxing protection alarm stage may be Enabled/Disabled in the “V/f Alarm
Status” cell.
In general, a generator or generator transformer overflux condition will occur if the
V/Hz ratio exceeds 1.05p.u. i.e. a 5% overvoltage condition at rated frequency.
The element is set in terms of the actual ratio of voltage to frequency; the overfluxing
threshold setting, “V/f Trip Setting”, can therefore be calculated as shown below:
where
− the VT secondary voltage at rated primary volts is 110V
− the rated frequency is 50Hz
The overfluxing alarm stage threshold setting, “V/f Alarm Set”, can be set lower than
the trip stage setting to provide an indication that abnormal conditions are present
and alert an operator to adjust system parameters accordingly.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
The time delay settings should be chosen to match the withstand characteristics of the
protected generator or generator/transformer. If an inverse time characteristic is
selected, the time multiplier setting, “V/f Trip TMS”, should be chosen so the
operating characteristic closely matches the withstand characteristic of the generator
or generator/transformer. If a definite time setting is chosen for the trip stage the
time delay is set in the “V/f Trip Delay” cell. The alarm stage time delay is set in the
“V/f Alarm Delay” cell.
Reference should be made to manufacturers withstand characteristics before
formulating these settings.
2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection
Accidental energisation of a generator when the machine is not running can cause
severe damage to the machine. If the breaker is closed, when the machine is at
standstill, the generator will begin to act as an induction motor with the surface of the
rotor core and the rotor winding slot wedges acting as the rotor current conductors.
This abnormal current in the rotor can cause arcing between components, e.g. slot
wedge to core, and results in rapid overheating and damage.
To provide fast protection for this condition, the P343 relay provides an instantaneous
overcurrent element that is gated with a three phase undervoltage detector. The
scheme logic of this function is shown in Figure 30.
The element is enabled when the machine is not running, i.e. not generating any
voltage, or when the breaker is open. Therefore the element can have a low current
setting, resulting in high speed operation when required. For the element to operate
correctly the relay voltage input must be from a machine side VT; busbar VTs cannot
be used.
50
& Trip
27
tPU
& tDO
VTS
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Dead Mach Ι> 0.1 Ιn A 0.08 Ιn A 4 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
80 V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Dead Mach V<
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
RTD 1 RTD 1
RTD 2 RTD 2
RTD 10 RTD 10
MiCOM P343 MiCOM P343
P2178ENa
See the Installation section (P34x/EN IN) of the Operating Guide, for
recommendations on RTD connections and cables.
Setting ranges for the RTD Thermal protection are shown in the following table:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RTD PROTECTION
Bit 0 - Select RTD 1
Bit 1 - Select RTD 2
Bit 2 - Select RTD 3
Bit 3 - Select RTD 4
Bit 4 - Select RTD 5
Select RTD 0000000000
Bit 5 - Select RTD 6
Bit 6 - Select RTD 7
Bit 7 - Select RTD 8
Bit 8 - Select RTD 9
Bit 9 - Select RTD 10
RTD x Alarm Set 80°C 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD x Alarm Dly 10s 0 100s 1s
RTD x Trip Set 85°C 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD x Trip Dly 1s 0 100s 1s
Where x = 1 to 10
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection
Each RTD can be enabled by setting the relevant bit in “Select RTD”. For example if
Select RTD is set to 0000000111, then RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 would be enabled and
the associated settings would be visible in the menu.
The temperature setting for the alarm stage for each RTD can be set in the
“RTD x Alarm Set” cells and the alarm time delay in the “RTD x Alarm Dly” cell.
The temperature setting for the trip stage for each RTD can be set in the
“RTD x Trip Set” cells and the trip stage time delay in the “RTD x Trip Dly” cell.
Typical operating temperatures for protected plant are given in the table below.
These are provided as a guide, actual figures MUST be obtained from the equipment
manufacturers:
Eg Es
Zg Ir Zs
jX
Eg/Es = 2.8 (>max)
Xs R
Eg/Es = 1.2
0.5Xd'
Eg/Es = 1.0
Xg Diameter = Xd
P2179ENa
It can be seen from the simple analysis of Figure 32 that the field failure protection
function may respond to the variation in impedance seen during pole slipping for
some applications. However the impedance characteristic offset might have to be
reduced to guarantee response for the theoretical lower range of dynamic generator
impedance (Xg). The lack of the normally recommended characteristic offset should
not pose any problem of unwanted protection function response during the normal
range of operation of a machine (with rotor angles kept below 90°), but a longer trip
time delay might be required to prevent unwanted protection response during stable
power swings caused by system disturbances. The most marginal condition to detect
is where the generator is fully loaded, with maximum excitation applied. Even if the
impedance characteristic offset is not reduced, impedance element pick up should
still occur during part of a slip cycle, when the machine impedance is high and where
the rotor angle is high. More careful consideration might have to be given to the
reset time delay setting (“FFail1 DO Timer”) required in such circumstances.
During pole slipping, any operation of the field failure protection function will be
cyclic and so it would be necessary to set the reset time delay (“FFail1 DO Timer”) to
be longer than the time for which the impedance seen will cyclically lie outside the
field failure characteristic. A typical delay setting might be 0.6s, to cover slip
frequencies in excess of 2Hz. When the timer “FFail1 DO Timer” is set, the field
failure trip time delay (“FFail1 Time Delay”) must be increased to be greater than the
setting of “FFail1 DO Timer”.
Sometimes pole slipping protection must be guaranteed, especially in the case of a
larger utility generator connected to a relatively weak transmission system. In such
applications, and where fast tripping is required, or where the pole slipping response
of field failure protection function is otherwise uncertain, a stand-alone protection
scheme, such as used in the P343 should be used. The delayed detection and
tripping offered by the P340 Field Failure protection function should, however, be
adequate for many applications.
For further details regarding setting of field failure protection for time delayed pole
slipping detection, contact AREVA T&D.
During normal system operation the following events can lead to the generator pole
slipping condition.
• The occurrence of an abnormality such as:
A transient system fault.
The failure of the generator governor.
The failure of the generator excitation control (asynchronous running).
Reconnection of an 'islanded' system without synchronisation.
• The transient change in the system requirements of real and reactive power
components sets the generator rotor to oscillate around the new equilibrium point.
• If the initial transient disturbance is severe enough and for a sufficiently long
duration the rotor swing may exceed the maximum stability limit causing the
generator to slip poles.
• For a weak system switching transients may also result in pole slipping.
Nowadays, with the advent of EHV systems, large conductor-cooled generators and
with the expansion of the transmission system, system and generator impedances
have changed considerably. System impedances have decreased while generator
and step-up transformer impedances have increased. This trend has resulted in the
impedance centre during a power swing appearing inside the step-up transformer or
inside the generator, which is generally out of the protection zone of conventional
out-of-step relays installed in the system. Therefore, separate relaying should be
applied to protect the machine against pole slipping.
Relays employing impedance-measuring elements for the detection of the pole
slipping condition utilise the generator terminal voltage and current signals as inputs.
During a generator pole slip the system voltage and current go through slip frequency
variations of extremely high amplitude. These variations are reflective of the
corresponding apparent changes in the generator terminal impedance. The relay will
be able to detect the condition only after the generator has actually slipped poles.
The conventional technique employs measurement of generator terminal impedance
to determine pole slipping conditions. Directional and blinder elements are used
together with a mho element to obtain the desired relay characteristics.
2.22.2 Loss of synchronism characteristics
Before any further discussion, it is necessary to have a brief review of the loss of
synchronism characteristic which is used in the analysis of generator pole slipping.
A common method used to detect a loss of synchronism is to analyse the apparent
impedance as measured at the generator terminals. According to the simplified
representation of a machine and system shown in Figure 33, the impedance
presented to the relay ZR (installed at point A) under a loss of synchronism
(recoverable power swing or pole slipping) condition can be described by equation1:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
P1254ENa
Where:
Where:
EG
n = E = magnitude ratio of generator terminal voltage to the system voltage
S
ĖG
δ = arg Ė = rotor angle by which generator terminal voltage leads system voltage
S
P1255ENa
As the locus crosses this point and enters the left hand side of the line GS, the
generator and system will become more in phase. A slip cycle has been completed
when the locus reaches the point where the swing started.
Note that the following assumptions have been made in this simplified approach:
• EG/ ES is assumed to remain constant during the swing.
shown to be equal to the transient reactance X’d at 50% slip, and to 2X’d with a slip
of 0.33%. As most slips are likely to be experienced at low asynchronous speed
running, perhaps 1%, it is sufficient to take the value XG=2X’d when assessing pole
slipping.
2.22.3.4How to determine the slip rate of pole slipping?
The rate of slip between the generator and power system is a function of the
accelerating torque and inertia of the systems. In general, the slip rate can not be
obtained analytically. It is recommended to determine the slip rate by transient
stability studies where the angular excursion of the system is plotted versus time.
Although the slip rate will not be constant during a pole slipping condition, it is
reasonable to assume a constant for the first half slip cycle which is of interest to the
relay. For the tandem generator, it is in the range of 250 to 400 degrees/sec. Whilst
for the cross compound units, the average initial slip will be 400 to 800 degrees/sec.
2.22.4 General requirements for pole slipping protection
Having got some ideas about the characteristics of pole slipping, general rules for
pole slipping protection could be obtained as listed below:
• On the whole, the pole slipping protection must remain stable under all fault
conditions and recoverable power swings other than a genuine non-recoverable
pole slipping condition.
• For a particular loss of synchronism condition, if the impedance centre happens to
lie in the generator/step-up transformer zone, it is recommended the generator
be tripped without delay, preferably during the first half slip cycle of a loss of
synchronism condition. If the centre lies outside of the zone, then the pole
slipping relay should not trip immediately, but should allow time for tripping to
take place at some other location external to the power station. Only if this
should fail must the pole slipping protection respond in stage II, i.e. after a pre-set
number of slips, to isolate the generator.
• In order to reduce the damage to the generator during a pole slip, it must reliably
detect the first and subsequent slips of a synchronous machine within a wide
range (slipping frequency 0.1% to 10% of fn).
• The tripping should avoid the point where the generator and the system are 180
degrees out-of-phase, when the currents reach the maximum value and subject
the circuit breaker to a maximum recovery voltage during interruption.
• Since pole slipping is essentially a balanced three-phase phenomenon, only a
single phase element need be implemented in the protection relay.
2.22.5 Lenticular scheme
2.22.5.1Characteristic
The P343 pole slipping characteristic consists of three parts as shown in the R/X
diagram of Figure 35. The first part is the lenticular (lens) characteristic. The second
is a straight line referred to as the blinder that bisects the lens and divides the
impedance plane into the left and right halves. The third is a reactance line which is
perpendicular to the blinder.
The inclination of the lens and the blinder, θ, is determined by the angle of the total
system impedance. The equivalent impedance of the system and the step-up
transformer determines the forward reach of the lens, ZA, whereas the generator’s
transient reactance determines the reverse reach ZB. The width of the lens is varied
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
by the setting of the angle α. A reactance line, perpendicular to the axis of the lens,
is used to distinguish whether the impedance centre of the swing is located in the
power system or in the generator. It is set by the value of Zc along the axis of the
lens, as shown in Figure 35. The reactance line splits the lens into Zone 1 (below the
line) and Zone 2 (above the line).
For the pole slipping protection element the minimum operating current is 2% Ιn and
the minimum voltage is 1 V for 100/120 and 4V for 380/480 V ratings. The pole
slipping protection operates from the ΙA and VA current and voltage inputs to the
relay.
Blinder
X
ZA
ZC
Reactance Line
α
θ
R
Lens
ZB
P1256ENa
VTS-FAST-BLOCK
Actions are the same as Zm = R1 or R3
State Machine Entry
Zm = R4
IF(Mode_Both)
IDLE Flag_Mode=!Flag_Mode;
Zm = R1 .
Reset Start_Signals;
Reset Flag_Zone1; Zm = R2
Start Timer1
IF(Any Trip_Signal)
Reset Counters;
Reset Trip_Signals; Zm = R1 or R4
Reset Timer1
Zm = R3 but Timer1<T1
Reset Timer1
Zm = R1 or R2
Reset Flag_Zone1; Zm = R2
Zm = R4 but Timer2 < T2 Reset Timer2;
Reset Flag_Zone1;
Zm = R4 or R2 or R3 DETECTED Reset Timer2; START
P0421ENa
X Blinder
Zone2
Reactance Line
Zone1
R4 R3 R2 R1
R
Lens
R represents Region
P1257ENa
called the electrical centre. Timer2 is used to time the duration of the impedance
locus remaining in R3;
If the impedance moves to R1 or R4 or moves to R3 but stays in R2 less than T1,
the state machine will be reset to the ‘Idle’ state. Timer 1 is reset when the
impedance leaves R2 via these abnormal exits. Besides pole slipping, a stable
power swing or fault occurrence could enter this state as well. The state machine
is designed to differentiate these conditions.
• Confirm: This state is reached when the impedance has crossed the blinder and
arrived at Region3. Further confirmation is required to see if the impedance stays
for at least time T2 and is bound to leave for R4. Otherwise, an abnormal exit
will reset the state machine to the ‘Idle’ state. Actions on abnormal transition
include resetting Flag_Zone1 and Timer 2. Note, that as soon as the impedance
locus leaves the lens through the normal exit counters of different zones will be
updated, depending on the Flag_Zone1 and if the pole slip has completed the
pre-set slip cycles setting a trip signal is given. If Flag_Zone1 is set then the Zone
1 counter (C1) will be incremented. Zone 2 is the backup pole slipping stage and
so all pole slips increment the Zone2 counter (C2).
The Reset_Timer and reset Timer 2 are started when the normal transition occurs.
The Reset_Timer is started only when the first pole slip is detected and will be reset in
its time delay (see Reset_Timer time out actions in the state machine diagram).
• Detected: This is the stage where the impedance locus has to complete it’s full
cycle although the counter is updated in the previous confirm stage. Abnormal
movements of the impedance locus in this stage will be ignored and this state is
kept until the impedance moves to R1 indicating completion of a pole slip cycle.
If a trip signal has not been given for this pole slip, only the Start_Signals and
Flag_Zone1 are reset in preparation for the next pole slip cycle. However, if a trip
signal has been issued, then the Trip_Signals and the counters are both reset.
In general, once the measured impedance has traversed all the ‘States’ in the normal
exit sequence, a pole slip is confirmed. For a stable power swing or fault condition
the measured impedance will not satisfy all the exit transition criteria.
The ‘State Machine’ diagram has been simplified to present an overview of how to
detect pole slipping. There are also several supporting protection functions which are
explained in the following sections.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Flag_Zone1
poleslz_RegionCal
& R1
poleslz_Zone1Pu( )
IAi,IAj Zone1 Start
poleslz_BlinderPu()
&
(Generating Mode - Pick-up zone left of blinder; Zone1
Motoring Mode - Pick-up zone right of blinder) Zone 1 Trip
Count++
poleslz_LensPu() Genuine
Pole Slipping
Pole Slipping State Machine
Zone2 Start
Zone2
&
Zone 2 Trip
Count++
R3
& R4
P1258ENa
2.22.6.3Motoring mode
When the ‘pole slip mode’ setting is set to ‘motoring’ the protection algorithm is
switched to motoring mode. Motoring mode is essentially the same for generating
mode except that the pick-up zone for the blinder is changed from the left hand side
to the right hand side, as shown in Figure 39. This requires changes to the blinder
algorithm in poleslz_BlinderPu().
This automatically changes the region definition on the impedance plane. For
example, under normal motoring conditions, both the blinder, which picks up from
the left hand side for motoring, and the lens will not be picked up. Therefore, the
poleslz_RegionCal() will output a region number R1.
X Blinder
Pick-Up Zone
Zone2
Reactance Line
Zone1
R1 R2 R3 R4
R
Lens
R represents Region
P1257ENb
X Z
A
Left-Len Right-Len
A B
Reactance Line Zs
Power Swing In System
Zc
Q
N SXT
a M
P
Ang
T R
2 T
1
Pole Slipping
Characteristic
XG
Stable Power Swing
Z
B
Blinder
P2180ENa
As noted previously, the best setting for the lens is when the point ZA and ZB
coincide with the system impedance (ZT+ZS) and the generator reactance (XG),
see Figure 34. The angle α of the lens corresponds in this case to the angle α
between the emfs EG and ES at which the impedance enters the lens, see
Figure 34.
As most slips are likely to be experienced at low asynchronous speed running,
perhaps 1%, it is sufficient to take the value XG=2X’d when assessing pole
slipping, see section 2.22.3.3.
Where the values of ZS and the generator reactance XG vary, ZAand ZB should
be set according to the corresponding maximum values.
Large differences between EG and ES, see Figure 34 and sections 2.22.3.1,
can cause the loci of impedance circle to becomes smaller and smaller.
Therefore, there is the possibility of the circular loci of the pole slip crossing the
blinder and lens twice with large ZA and ZB settings producing a long lens.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
However, the state machine logic will prevent 2 pole slips from being counted
for this condition and so there is no maximum limit to the ZA and ZB settings.
2. Lens inclination θ
The inclination of the lens should be kept consistent with the system impedance
angle, vector GS in Figure 34.
3. angle α.
The width of the lens is proportional to the angle α. Two factors should be
considered to determine the proper angle α:
• Under all conditions, the load impedance remains safely outside the lens.
• The tripping point, limited by the left side of the lens for generating should
be the point when the angular separation between the system and the
generator is small. Although CBs are rated to break twice the system
voltage i.e. when the machines are in anti-phase, it is recommended that
the trip command is issued at the smallest phase shift possible. For this
reason the angle α should be chosen as small as possible (setting range is
90o to 150o).
The construction of the lens can be seen in Figure 40, ZR is the maximum width of
half the lens. The minimum resistive component of the load should be at least 130%
of the reach of the lens, ZR, in the transverse direction. ZR can be determined by
calculation as follows:
For a given minimal load resistance RLmin the minimum permissible setting of α is:
Note: The minimum relay setting for α is 90o as this defines the largest
size of the characteristic, a circle.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
X Blinder
Pick-Up Zone
Zone2
Reactance Line
Zone1
R1 R2 R3 R4
R
Lens
R represents Region
P1256ENb
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1 POLE SLIPPING
Pslip Function Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Pole Slip Mode Generating Motoring, Generating, Both
0.5/Ιn Ω 350/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Pslip Za Forward 100/Ιn Ω
2/Ιn Ω 1400/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
2.22.7.2DDB output
Apart from the Zone1 and Zone2 start and trip signals, each measuring element also
outputs its ‘status’ onto the DDB. These signals can be used during commissioning
testing to determine the shape and the accuracy of the characteristics.
The location of the pole slipping relay is at the generator terminals. The direction of
ZA and Zc is towards the step up transformer and the rest of the system. The
reactance line is required to distinguish between power swings with electrical centres
within the generator/transformer zone and those outside.
The base impedance is
Zbase = Vn2/Pn = 182/360 = 0.9 Ω
The minimum suitable angle α which defines the lens limit in relation to the minimum
load resistance is
αmin = 180° – 2 x tan-1 (1.54 x RLmin / ( ZA + ZB))
αmin = 65.7o
The minimum setting for α on the relay is 90° so this is the setting used.
T1 and T2 are set to 15 ms and θ is set to the system impedance angle of 80°
currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator design. The
P340 thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by
negative sequence current when the machine is running. This biasing is done by
creating an equivalent heating current rather than simply using the phase current.
The M factor is a constant that relates negative sequence rotor resistance to positive
sequence rotor resistance. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is
disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator
positive sequence current. Note, the P340 also includes a negative sequence
overcurrent protection function based on Ι22t specifically for thermal protection of the
rotor.
The equivalent current for operation of the overload protection is in accordance with
the following expression:
Ιeq = √(Ι12 + MΙ22)
where
Ι1 = positive sequence current
Ι2 = negative sequence current
M = a user settable constant proportional to the thermal capacity of the
machine
As previously described, the temperature of a generator will rise exponentially with
increasing current. Similarly, when the current decreases, the temperature also
decreases in a similar manner. Therefore, in order to achieve close sustained
overload protection, the P343 relay incorporates a wide range of thermal time
constants for heating and cooling.
Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the generator is affected by heating
in the winding prior to the overload. The thermal replica is designed to take account
the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the ‘cold’ condition and the full rated
pre-fault current, known as the ‘hot’ condition. With no pre-fault current the relay will
be operating on the ‘cold curve’. When a generator is or has been running at full
load prior to an overload the ‘hot curve’ is applicable. Therefore, during normal
operation the relay will be operating between these two limits.
The following equation is used to calculate the trip time for a given current. Note that
the relay will trip at a value corresponding to 100% of it’s thermal state.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
t = τ loge (Ιeq2 – ΙP2)/(Ιeq2 – (Thermal Ι>)2
where
t = time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι
τ = heating time constant of the protected plant
Ιeq = equivalent current
Thermal Ι> = relay setting current
ΙP = steady state pre-load current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from 'hot” or “cold”.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
THERMAL OVERLOAD
ΙThermal Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Thermal Ι> 1.2 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 2.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Thermal Alarm 90% 20% 100% 1%
T-heating 60 mins 1 min 200 mins 1 min
T-cooling 60 mins 1 min 200 mins 1 min
M Factor 0 0 10 1
• A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is used
to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires
duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should re-
tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an
additional time delay. The backtrip uses ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’, which is also started at
the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ and ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’ can be configured to operate
for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection
trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to
‘External Trip’ using the programmable scheme logic.
2.24.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to
indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as
required. This covers the following situations:
• Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to
definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
• Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may
result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing
resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault
current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element
may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of
undercurrent elements (Ι<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have
tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be
reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example:
• Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage
transformer. Here, Ι< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit
would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating
protection element might be a more reliable method.
• Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage
transformer. Again using Ι< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded.
Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the
busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such
cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset
method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay’s pole
dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed
provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are
summarised in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB FAIL + Ι<
Breaker Fail {Sub-Heading}
CB Fail 1 Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 1 Timer 0.2s 0s 10s 0.01s
CB Fail 2 Status Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 2 Timer 0.4s 0s 10s 0.01s
CBF Non Ι Reset CB Open & Ι< Ι< Only, CB Open & Ι<, Prot Reset & Ι<
CBF Ext Reset CB Open & Ι< Ι< Only, CB Open & Ι<, Prot Reset & Ι<
Under Current {Sub-Heading}
Ι< Current Set 0.1Ιn 0.02Ιn 3.2Ιn 0.01Ιn
ΙN< Current Set 0.1Ιn 0.02Ιn 3.2Ιn 0.01Ιn
ΙSEF< Current 0.02Ιn 0.001Ιn 0.8Ιn 0.00025Ιn
Blocked O/C {Sub-Heading}
Remove Ι> Start Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Remove ΙN> Start Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Ι< Current Input IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 / IA-2, IB-2, IC-2
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
The ‘Remove Ι> Start‘ and ‘Remove ΙN> Start‘ settings are used to remove starts
issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail
time out (DDB 628 Ι> Block Start, DDB 629 ΙN/SEF > Blk Start). The start is
removed when the cell is set to Enabled. This can be used to remove a blocking
signal from an upstream relay to back trip and clear the fault.
2.24.3 Typical settings
2.24.3.1Breaker fail timer settings
Typical timer settings to use are as follows:
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements.
Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting
should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2½ cycle circuit breaker. Note that
where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10 – 15 ms must be added to
allow for trip relay operation.
2.24.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings
The phase undercurrent settings (Ι<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that
Ι< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for
overhead line or cable circuits is 20% Ιn, with 5% Ιn common for generator circuit
breaker CBF.
The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standby earth fault (SBEF) undercurrent
elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows:
ΙSEF< = (ΙSEF> trip) / 2
ΙN< = (ΙN> trip) / 2
For generator applications the undercurrent elements should be measuring current
from CTs on the terminal side of the generator. This is because for an internal fault
on the generator after the CB has tripped the generator will still be supplying some
fault current which will be seen by undercurrent elements measuring current from CTs
on the neutral side of the generator. This could thus give false indication of a
breaker fail condition.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
SETTING [4503] :
DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3)
CB Fail 1 Timer
OR S
SETTING [4502] :
DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph Q tbf1
CB Fail 1 Status
R
AND DDB #493 : Bfail1 Trip 3ph
DDB #631 : IA< Start G37-0 : Disabled
0s
G37-1 : Enabled
DDB #632 : IB< Start
SETTING [4504] :
tbf2
CB Fail 2 Status
DDB #635 : IN< Start
AND DDB #494 : Bfail2 Trip 3ph
G37-0 : Disabled
DDB #447 : ISEF>1 Trip OR
0s
G37-1 : Enabled
Q
DDB #634 : ISEF< Start R
x 2 Stages
x 2 Stages
x 2 Stages
DDB #422, 423 : Field Fail Trip SETTING [4506] : SETTING [4507] :
AND AND
Volt Prot Reset Ext Prot Reset
DDB #429 : V/Hz Trip
x10 Stages
G68-0 : I< Only OR G68-0 : I< Only OR
DDB #430 - 439 : RTD Trip G68-1 : CB Open & I< G68-1 : CB Open & I<
This mode of breaker failure is most likely to occur on one phase initially and can be
detected by a neutral current measuring element. If the generator is directly
connected to the power system, the second stage of stator earth fault protection
(“ΙN>2 ...”) could be applied as an instantaneous element by setting the time delay
“ΙN>2 TimeDelay” to 0s, to quickly detect the flashover. To prevent loss of
co-ordination this stage must be blocked when the circuit breaker is closed. This can
be programmed by correct configuration of the programmable scheme logic and can
be integrated into the circuit breaker fail logic, as shown in Figure 44.
Where the machine is connected to the system via a step-up transformer a similar
scheme can be arranged. The P340 relay standby earth fault protection element can
be connected to measure the transformer HV earth fault current to provide the
breaker flashover protection, via suitable scheme logic. The machine earth fault
protection can be provided by the P340 sensitive earth fault protection element, as
shown in Figure 44.
IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100
MiCOM
P343
P2182ENa
IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100
MiCOM
P343
P2183ENa
Generator
CB fail backtrip
O/P CB
from fail
start backtrip
contact
10.0
1.0
Time P3xx IDMT element
(secs) IDMT margin
0.1 Feeder IDMT element
P3xx high set element
0.08
Time to block
Feeder start contact
0.01
1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (kA)
P2185ENb
Figure 47 also shows the relationship between the measured current and the
analogue to digital conversion (ADC) count. The hardware design allows for over-
ranging, with the maximum ADC count (4095 for a 12-bit ADC) corresponding to
1.0836mA for the 0-1mA range, and 22.7556mA for the 0-10mA, 0-20mA and
4-20mA ranges. The relay will therefore continue to measure and display values
beyond the Maximum setting, within its numbering capability (-9999 to 9999).
Transducer Transducer
Value Value
Maximum
Maximum
Minimum Minimum
ADC ADC
Count Count
0 4095 0 4095
Current I/P Current I/P
0mA 1mA 1.0836mA 0mA 10mA 22.7556mA
Minimum
Minimum
ADC ADC
Count Count
0 4095 0 4095
Current I/P Current I/P
0mA 20mA 22.7556mA 0mA 4mA 20mA 22.7556mA
0-20mA 4-20mA
P1417ENa
Each current loop input can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL, (CL Input 1/2/3/4 Blk, DDB 393-396). If a current loop input is blocked the
protection and alarm stages and 4-20mA undercurrent alarm associated with that
input are blocked. The blocking signals may be useful for blocking the current loop
inputs when the CB is open for example.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting an operation of the alarm and trip
stages of the each current loop inputs, (CLI1/2/3/4 Alarm Start: DDB 658-661,
CLI1/2/3/4 Trip Start: DDB 662-665, CL Input 1/2/3/4 Alarm: DDB 322-325, CLI
Input1/2/3/4 Trip: DDB 508-511). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed
to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the
relay.
Setting ranges for the current loop inputs are shown in the following table:
Current Current
Output Output
1mA 10mA
0mA 0mA
Minimum Maximum Relay Minimum Maximum Relay
Measure- Measure-
0-1mA ment 0-10mA ment
Current Current
Output Output
20mA 20mA
4mA
0mA 0mA
Minimum Maximum Relay Minimum Maximum Relay
Measure- Measure-
0-20mA ment 4-20mA ment
P1418ENa
Figure 48: Relationship between the current output and the relay
measurement
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
Note, if the Maximum is set less than the Minimum, the slopes of the graphs will be
negative. This is because the mathematical relationship remains the same
irrespective of how Maximum and Minimum are set, e.g., for 0-1mA range,
Maximum always corresponds to 1mA and Minimum corresponds to 0mA.
The P340 transducers are of the current output type. This means that the correct
value of output will be maintained over the load range specified. The range of load
resistance varies a great deal, depending on the design and the value of output
current. Transducers with a full scale output of 10mA will normally feed any load up
to a value of 1000Ω (compliance voltage of 10V). This equates to a cable length of
15km (approximately) for lightweight cable (1/0.6mm cable). A screened cable
earthed at one end only is recommended to reduce interference on the output current
signal. The table below gives typical cable impedances/km for common cables. The
compliance voltage dictates the maximum load that can be fed by a transducer
output. Therefore, the 20mA output will be restricted to a maximum load of 500Ω
approximately.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
CLIO PROTECTION
CLIO Output 1 Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CLO1 Output Type 4-20mA 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
CLO1 Set Values Primary Primary, Secondary
A list of parameters are shown in the
CLO1 Parameter IA Magnitude
table below
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Range, step size and unit corresponds to
CLO1 Minimum 0
the selected parameter in the table below
Range, step size and unit corresponds to
CLO1 Maximum 1.2 In
the selected parameter in the table below
Repeat for current loop inputs 2, 3 and 4
Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Current Magnitude IA Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
IN Measured Mag
Sensitive Current I Sen Magnitude A 0 to 2A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Input Magnitude
Phase Sequence I1 Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Current I2 Magnitude
Components I0 Magnitude
RMS Phase IA RMS* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Currents IB RMS*
IC RMS*
P-P Voltage VAB Magnitude V 0 to 0.1V 0V 140V
Magnitude VBC Magnitude 200V
VCA Magnitude
P-N voltage VAN Magnitude V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VBN Magnitude 200V
VCN Magnitude
Neutral Voltage VN Measured Mag V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VN Derived Mag 200V
3rd Harmonic VN 3rd Harmonic V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Neutral Voltage 200V
Phase Sequence V1 Magnitude* V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltage V2 Magnitude 200V
Components V0 Magnitude
RMS Phase VAN RMS* V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltages VBN RMS* 200V
VCN RMS*
Frequency Frequency Hz 0 to 0.01Hz 45Hz 65Hz
70Hz
3 Ph Active Power 3 Phase Watts* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
to
6000W
3 Ph Reactive 3 Phase Vars* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Power to
6000Var
3 Ph Apparent 3 Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 300VA
Power to
6000VA
3 Ph Power Factor 3Ph Power Factor* - -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Single Phase Active A Phase Watts* W -2000W 1W 0W 100W
Power B Phase Watts* to
C Phase Watts* 2000W
Single Phase A Phase Vars* Var -2000Var 1Var 0Var 100Var
Reactive Power B Phase Vars* to
C Phase Vars* 2000Var
Single Phase A Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 100VA
Apparent Power B Phase VA* to
C Phase VA* 2000VA
Single Phase Power APh Power Factor* -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Factor BPh Power Factor*
CPh Power Factor*
3 Phase Current IA Fixed Demand* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Demands IB Fixed Demand*
IC Fixed Demand*
IA Roll Demand*
IB Roll Demand*
IC Roll Demand*
IA Peak Demand*
IB Peak Demand*
IC Peak Demand*
3Ph Active Power 3Ph W Fix W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
Demands Demand* to
3Ph W Roll Dem* 6000W
3Ph W Peak Dem*
3Ph Reactive Power 3Ph Vars Fix Dem* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Demands 3Ph Var Roll Dem* to
3Ph Var Peak Dem* 6000Var
Rotor Thermal NPS Thermal % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
Stator Thermal Thermal Overload % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
RTD Temperatures RTD 1* °C -40°C 0.1°C 0°C 200°C
RTD 2* to
RTD 3* 300°C
RTD 4*
RTD 5*
RTD 6*
RTD 7*
RTD 8*
RTD 9*
RTD 10*
Current Loop CL Input 1 - -9999 0.1 0 9999
Inputs CL Input 2 to
CL Input 3 9999
CL input 4
Note 4: For the P343, the IA/IB/IC Current magnitudes are IA-1
Magnitude, IB-1 Magnitude, IC-1 Magnitude.
2.27.4 Setting guidelines for current loop outputs
Each current loop output can be selected as Enabled or Disabled. One of four types
of analogue output can be selected for transducers with ranges of 0-1mA, 0-10mA,
0-20mA or 4-20mA. The 4-20mA range is often used so that an output current is still
present when the measured value falls to zero. This is to give a fail safe indication
and may be used to distinguish between the analogue transducer output becoming
faulty and the measurement falling to zero.
The Maximum and Minimum settings allow the user to enter the measuring range for
each analogue output. The range, step size and unit corresponding to the selected
parameter is shown in the table above. This allows the user to “zoom in” and
monitor a restricted range of the measurements with the desired resolution. For
voltage, current and power quantities, these settings can be set in either primary or
secondary quantities, depending on the ‘CLO1/2/3/4 Set Values – Primary /
Secondary’ setting associated with each current loop output.
The relationship of the output current to the value of the measurand is of vital
importance and needs careful consideration. Any receiving equipment must, of
course, be used within its rating but, if possible, some kind of standard should be
established.
One of the objectives must be to have the capability to monitor the voltage over a
range of values, so an upper limit must be selected, typically 120%. However, this
may lead to difficulties in scaling an instrument.
The same considerations apply to current transducers outputs and with added
complexity to watt transducers outputs, where both the voltage and current
transformer ratios must be taken into account.
Some of these difficulties do not need to be considered if the transducer is only
feeding, for example, a SCADA outstation. Any equipment which can be
programmed to apply a scaling factor to each input individually can accommodate
most signals. The main consideration will be to ensure that the transducer is capable
of providing a signal right up to the full-scale value of the input, that is, it does not
saturate at the highest expected value of the measurand.
3.1 VT supervision
The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in
one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there
would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as
measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically
adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be
compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available.
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply.
These are defined below:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the relays
pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions i.e. where no
voltage will be present and the VTS Ι> Inhibit overcurrent element will not be picked
up.
1
IA>
&
IB> tVTS
IC> S
0
Q
VA>
VB>
& 1 R 1 & SLOW BLOCK
&
VC>
V2>
&
I2
DIA>
DIB>
DIC> 1 & S
Q
R
1 &
VTS_MANRESET
VTS_AUTORESET
VTS_BLOCKING
& 1 INDICATION
ANY VOLTAGE 1 S
&
DEPENDENT FUNCTION
S Q
Q R
R
&
20ms
P2226ENa
Note: The accelerated ind input is not used in the generator protection.
3.1.2.1 Inputs
3.1.2.2 Outputs
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
VTS Status Blocking Blocking, Indication
VTS Reset Mode Manual Manual, Auto
VTS Time Delay 5s 1s 10s 0.1s
VTS Ι> Inhibit 10Ιn 0.08Ιn 32Ιn 0.01Ιn
VTS Ι2> Inhibit 0.05Ιn 0.05Ιn 0.5Ιn 0.01Ιn
3.2 CT supervision
The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of
the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of
the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated
element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT
secondary voltages being generated.
3.2.1 The CT supervision feature
The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in the
absence of corresponding derived or measured residual voltage that would normally
accompany it.
The CT supervision can be set to operate from the residual voltage measured at the
VNEUTRAL input or the residual voltage derived from the 3 phase-neutral voltage
inputs as selected by the ‘CTS Vn Input’ setting.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages from
the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where
the 3 phase VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and
has the primary star point earthed. A derived residual voltage or a measured
residual voltage is available.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and
event record (plus DDB 293: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB 738:
CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from
derived quantities, (Neg Seq O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT
supervision element; other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the
PSL, integrating DDB 738: CTS Block with the protection function logic.
CTS block
I N>
& Time delay t CTS alarm
V N<
P2130ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
CT Supervision Sub Heading
CTS Status Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
CTS VN Input Derived Derived/Measured N/A
0.5/2V For 110/440V respectively
CTS VN< Inhibit 1 22/88V For 110/440V respectively 0.5/2V
For 110/440V respectively
CTS ΙN> Set 0 0.08 x Ιn 4 x Ιn 0.01 x Ιn
CTS Time Delay 5 0s 10s 1s
If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A
normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via
the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted
operation during normal switching duties.
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called ‘CB Status
Input’. This cell can be set at one of the following four options:
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
Where ‘None’ is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any
function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, auto-
reclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B
signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will be
available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also
true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status information
will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to
the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs
via the PSL. The CB State Monitoring logic is shown in Figure 51).
SETTING [0711] :
CB Status Input
G118-0 : None
G118-1 : 52A
G118-2 : 52B
G118-3 : Both 52A & 52B
AND
DDB #381 : CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
AND OR
DATA [000C] :
Plant Status
XOR
Bit 0 : CB1 Open
Bit 1 : CB1 Closed
AND OR
AND
5s
AND DDB #302 : CB Status Alarm
0s
XOR
DDB #382 : CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
P2227ENa
If one or more poles are dead the relay will indicate which phase is dead and will
also assert the ANY POLE DEAD DDB signal (DDB 758). If all phases were dead the
ANY POLE DEAD signal would be accompanied by the ALL POLE DEAD DDB signal
(DDB 757).
In the event that the VT fails a signal is taken from the VTS logic (DDB 737 – Slow
Block) to block the pole dead indications that would be generated by the under
voltage and undercurrent thresholds. However, the VTS logic will not block the pole
dead indications if they are initiated by a “CB Open” signal (DDB 754).
The pole dead logic diagram is shown below:
20ms
Ia< t Pole A Dead
& 1
Va< 0 DDB 759
20ms
Ib< t Pole B Dead
& 1
Vb< 0 DDB 760
20ms
Ic< t Pole C Dead
& 1
Vc< 0 DDB 761
P2186ENa
The P340 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation,
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be
determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
3.5.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the
following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values
only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These
cells can not be set:
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB CONDITION
CB operations
0 0 10000 1
{3 pole tripping}
Total ΙA Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1
Total ΙB Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1
Total ΙC Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
CB operate time 0 0 0.5s 0.001
Reset CB Data No Yes, No
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance
inspection and overhaul.
The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is
taken from the relay menu. It includes the set up of the current broken facility and
those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB MONITOR SETUP
Broken Ι^ 2 1 2 0.1
Ι^ Maintenance Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Ι^ Maintenance 1000Ιn^ 1Ιn^ 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
Ι^ Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Ι^ Lockout 2000Ιn^ 1Ιn^ 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
No CB Ops. Maint. Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
No CB Ops. Maint. 10 1 10000 1
No CB Ops. Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
No CB Ops. Lock 20 1 10000 1
CB Time Maint. Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Maint. 0.1s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
CB Time Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Lockout 0.2s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Fault Freq. Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Fault Freq. Count 10 1 9999 1
Fault Freq. Time 3600s 0 9999s 1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay
issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external
protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is
achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable
scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped
to the opto is called ‘Ext Trip 3Ph’, DDB 380.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters
will not be updated.
3.5.2 Setting guidelines
3.5.2.1 Setting the Σ Ι^ thresholds
Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit
breakers (OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of
the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit
breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where
fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The
Σ Ι^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCB’s, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
Σ Ι2t. This is where ‘Ι’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the
interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined
accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current
squared, by setting ‘Broken Ι^’ = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage
systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of ‘Broken Ι^’ = 2 may be
inappropriate. In such applications ‘Broken Ι^’ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or
1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum
interrupter HV pressure testing, for example.
The setting range for ‘Broken Ι^’ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is
imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the
switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.5.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds
Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its
components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be
based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold
will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the
autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents
further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard
demanded by the switchgear manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a
certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is
because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric
properties. The maintenance alarm threshold "No CB Ops Maint" may be set to
indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more
comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold "No CB Ops Lock" may be
set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be
guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion.
3.5.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance.
Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint/CB Time Lockout) are
provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to
the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
3.5.2.4 Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before
maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short
period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is
possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of
operations "Fault Freq Count" over a set time period "Fault Freq Time" to be
monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set.
3.5.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring features
MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b)
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will
be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one
of the following conditions:
• Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
• CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would
apply:
• Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB Time Maint 0.1s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
CB Time Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Lockout 0.2s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Fault Freq Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Fault Freq Count 10 0 9999 1
Fault Freq Time 3600s 0 9999s 1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay
issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external
protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable
scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped
to the opto is called ‘External Trip’.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters
will not be updated.
3.6 Trip circuit supervision (TCS)
The trip circuit, in most protective schemes, extends beyond the relay enclosure and
passes through components such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and
other terminal boards. This complex arrangement, coupled with the importance of
the trip circuit, has led to dedicated schemes for its supervision.
Several trip circuit supervision schemes with various features can be produced with
the P340 range. Although there are no dedicated settings for TCS, in the P340, the
following schemes can be produced using the programmable scheme logic (PSL). A
user alarm is used in the PSL to issue an alarm message on the relay front display. If
necessary, the user alarm can be re-named using the menu text editor to indicate that
there is a fault with the trip circuit.
3.6.1 TCS scheme 1
3.6.1.1 Scheme description
Optional
P2228ENa
This TCS scheme will function correctly even without resistor R1, since the opto input
automatically limits the supervision current to less that 10mA. However, if the opto is
accidentally shorted the circuit breaker may trip.
Note: When R1 is not fitted the opto voltage setting must be set equal
to supply voltage of the supervision circuit.
3.6.2 Scheme 1 PSL
Figure 54 shows the scheme logic diagram for the TCS scheme 1. Any of the
available opto inputs can be used to indicate whether or not the trip circuit is healthy.
The delay on drop off timer operates as soon as the opto is energised, but will take
400ms to drop off / reset in the event of a trip circuit failure. The 400ms delay
prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other circuits or during
normal tripping operation when the opto input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact.
When the timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED
and user alarms are reset.
The 50ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications
during the relay power up time, following an auxiliary supply interruption.
0 0
Opto Input Drop-Off Straight NC Output Relay
400 0
Latching LED
50
& Pick-up
0
User Alarm
P2229ENa
Optional
Optional
P2230ENa
DDB381
CB Aux 3ph (52a)
Opto Input A
0 0
1 Drop-Off Straight Output Relay
400 0
Opto Input B
DDB382
CB Aux 3ph (52b)
Latching LED
0
& Pick-Up
50
User Alarm
P2187ENa
P2231ENa
VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference Description
Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required event
Select Event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A value of
0 corresponds to the latest event and so on.
Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real
Time & Date
Time Clock
Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to
Event Text
following sections)
Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag representative of the Event (refer to
Event Value
following sections)
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault
Select Fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0
corresponds to the latest fault and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts,
protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated
with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference Description
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required
Select Maint. maintenance record from the possible 5 that may be stored.
A value of 0 corresponds to the latest record and so on.
Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to
Maint. Text
following sections).
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence.
Maint. Type They form a specific error code which should be quoted in
any related correspondence to AREVA T&D.
Maint. Data
Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications
Reset Indication
provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where
the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same
information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.7.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that
the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this
event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible
as shown below:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The
same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.7.3 Relay alarm conditions
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events.
The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they
appear in the event list:
Resulting Event
Alarm Condition
Event Text Event Value
Alarm Status 1 (Alarms 1-32) (32 bits)
Setting Group Via Opto
Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Bit position 2 in 32 bit field
Invalid
Protection Disabled Prot’n Disabled ON/OFF Bit position 3 in 32 bit field
Frequency Out of Range Freq out of Range ON/OFF Bit position 13 in 32 bit field
MR User Alarm 5-16 (Manual MR User Alarm 5-16 Bit position 16-27 in 32 bit
Reset) ON/OFF field
Field Voltage Fail Field V Fail ON/OFF Bit position 1 in 32 bit field
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value which displays alarms as bit
positions in a 32 bit field. The bit will be set to 1 if the alarm is ON and 0 if it is OFF.
This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and
output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as
MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on
the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the
particular condition has become operated or has reset.
The User Alarms can be operated from an opto input or a control input using the PSL.
They can thus be useful to give an alarm led and message on the LCD display and
an alarm indication via the communications of an external condition, for example trip
circuit supervision alarm, rotor earth fault alarm. The menu text editor in MiCOM S1
can be used to edit the user alarm text to give a more meaningful description on the
LCD display.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
Note that some occurrences will result in more than one type of event, e.g. a battery
failure will produce an alarm event and a maintenance record event.
If the Protection Event setting is Enabled a further set of settings is revealed which
allow the event generation by individual DDB signals to be enabled ‘1’ or disabled
‘0’.
As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst
the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/–
symbol.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
document P34x/EN GC/E33.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 1.5s 0.1s 10.5s 0.01s
Trigger Position 33.3% 0 100% 0.1%
Trigger Mode Single Single or Extended
VAN, VBN, VCN, VCHECK SYNC, ΙA, ΙB,
Analog Channel 1 VAN
ΙC, ΙN, ΙN SEF
Analog Channel 2 VBN As above
Analog Channel 3 VCN As above
Analog Channel 4 ΙA As above
Analog Channel 5 ΙB As above
Analog Channel 6 ΙC As above
Analog Channel 7 ΙN As above
Analog Channel 8 ΙN SEF As above
Relays 1 to 7/14
Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts
Digital Inputs 1 to and/or Opto’s 1 to 8/16
32 Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs
or
Internal Digital Signals
No Trigger, Trigger L/H except
Inputs 1 to 32
No Trigger Dedicated Trigger H/L Trip Relay
Trigger
O/P’s which are set to Trigger L/H
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
Note: The available analogue and digital signals will differ between
relay types and models and so the individual courier database in
SCADA Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33) should be referred
to when determining default settings etc.
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the ‘Duration’ and
‘Trigger Position’ cells. ‘Duration’ sets the overall recording time and the ‘Trigger
Position’ sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the
default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger
point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times.
If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore
the trigger if the ‘Trigger Mode’ has been set to ‘Single’. However, if this has been
set to ‘Extended’, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the
recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the
available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any
of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal
relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LED’s etc. The complete list of these
signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a
setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the
disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the ‘Input
Trigger’ cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts
(e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained
in SCADA Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33).
3.9 Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system
quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are
summarised below:
Phase Voltages and Currents
Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents
Sequence Voltages and currents
Power and Energy Quantities
Rms. Voltages and Currents
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values
There are also measured values from the protection functions, which also displayed
under the measurement columns of the menu; these are described in the section on
the relevant protection function.
3.9.1 Measured voltages and currents
The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current
values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by
the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle
measurement.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor on
a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor.
These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy
measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported
and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to maximum
values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to zero, it is also
possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces using the Reset
Demand cell.
3.9.4 Rms. voltages and currents
Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of
the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data.
3.9.5 Demand values
The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset Demand
menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or the remote
communications.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location.
3.9.6.1 Default display
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note
that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level
using the 8 and 2 keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default
display will revert to that selected by this setting.
3.9.6.2 Local values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and
the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
The Control Input commands can be found in the ‘Control Input’ menu. In the ‘Ctrl
Ι/P status’ menu cell there is a 32 bit word which represent the 32 control input
commands. The status of the 32 control inputs can be read from this 32 bit word.
The 32 control inputs can also be set and reset from this cell by setting a 1 to set or 0
to reset a particular control input. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control Inputs can
can be set and reset using the individual menu setting cells ‘Control Input 1, 2, 3, etc.
The Control Inputs are available through the relay menu as described above and also
via the rear communications.
In the programmable scheme logic editor 32 Control Input signals, DDB 832-863,
which can be set to a logic 1 or On state, as described above, are available to
perform control functions defined by the user.
The status of the Control Inputs are held in non-volatile memory (battery backed
RAM) such that when the relay is power-cycled, the states are restored upon power-
up.
3.12 VT connections
3.12.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's
The P342/3 relay can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT
secondaries to C19, C20 and C21 input terminals, with the C22 input left
unconnected (see Figures 2 and 17 in document P34x/EN CO/E33).
This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the
relay, or provide any phase to neutral voltage quantities. Therefore any protection
that is dependent upon zero sequence voltage measurements should be disabled
unless a direct measurement can be made via the measured VN input (C23-C24).
Therefore, neutral displacement protection, sensitive directional earth fault protection
and CT supervision should be disabled unless the residual voltage is measured
directly from the secondary of the earthing transformer or from a broken delta VT
winding on a 5 limb VT.
The under and over voltage protection can be set as phase-to-phase measurement
with vee connected VTs. The underimpedance and the voltage dependent
overcurrent use phase-phase voltages anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be
affected. The protection functions which use phase-neutral voltages are the power,
the loss of excitation and pole slipping protection; all are for detecting abnormal
generator operation under 3-phase balanced conditions, therefore the 'neutral' point,
although 'floating' will be approximately at the centre of the three phase voltage
vectors.
The accuracy of single phase voltage measurements can be impaired when using vee
connected VT’s. The relay attempts to derive the phase to neutral voltages from the
phase to phase voltage vectors. If the impedance of the voltage inputs were perfectly
matched the phase to neutral voltage measurements would be correct, provided the
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
phase to phase voltage vectors were balanced. However, in practice there are small
differences in the impedance of the voltage inputs, which can cause small errors in
the phase to neutral voltage measurements. This may give rise to an apparent
residual voltage. This problem also extends to single phase power and impedance
measurements that are also dependent upon their respective single phase voltages.
The phase to neutral voltage measurement accuracy can be improved by connecting
3, well matched, load resistors between the phase voltage inputs (C19, C20, C21)
and neutral C22, thus creating a ‘virtual’ neutral point. The load resistor values must
be chosen so that their power consumption is within the limits of the VT. It is
recommended that 10kΩ ±1% (6W) resistors are used for the 110V (Vn) rated relay,
assuming the VT can supply this burden.
3.12.2 VT single point earthing
The P340 range will function correctly with conventional 3 phase VT’s earthed at any
one point on the VT secondary circuit. Typical earthing examples being neutral
earthing and yellow phase earthing.
Grp PSL Ref When downloading a PSL to the relay, the user will be
prompted to enter which groups the PSL is for and a
reference ID. The first 32 characters of the reference ID
will be displayed in this cell. The 4 and 6 keys can be
used to scroll through 32 characters as only 16 can be
displayed at any one time.
18 Nov 2002 This cell displays the date and time when the PSL was
down loaded to the relay.
08:59:32.047
Grp 1 PSL ID This is a unique number for the PSL that has been entered.
- 2062813232 Any change in the PSL will result in a different number
being displayed.
Note: The above cells are repeated for each setting group.
SETTING: ENABLE 3s
1
& 0
SELF RESET DISABLE
60
Vk ≥ 30Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr) with a minimum of for X/R < 40
Ιn
Where the generator is impedance earthed and the maximum secondary earth fault
current is less than Ιn then the CT knee point voltage requirements are:
60
Vk ≥ 25Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr) with a minimum of for X/R <120
Ιn
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33
VK ≥ 2 * Ιs1 * Rs
where
Rs = Value of stabilising resistor (ohms)
Ιf = Maximum through fault current level (amps)
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts)
4.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase sequence
protection functions
When determining the current transformer requirements for an input that supplies
several protection functions, it must be ensured that the most onerous condition is
met. This has been taken into account in the formula given below. The formula is
equally applicable for current transformers mounted at either the neutral-tail end or
terminal end of the generator.
Vk ≥ 20Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr)
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Ιn = Relay rated current.
For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 1.0Ιn. For IEC standard protection class
current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
4.3 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current input
4.3.1 Line current transformers
With reference to section 2.15, the sensitive directional earth fault input current
transformer could be driven by three residually connected line current transformers.
It has been assumed that the sensitive directional earth fault protection function will
only be applied when the stator earth fault current is limited to the stator winding
rated current or less. Also assumed is that the maximum X/R ratio for the impedance
to a bus earth fault will be no greater than 10. The required minimum kneepoint
voltage will therefore be:
Vk ≥ 6 Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr)
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Ιn = Relay rated current.
VK ≥ 48 * Ιn * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40, 15Ιn < Ιf < 40Ιn
VA x ALF
Vk = + ALF x Ιn x Rct
Ιn
VK = Required CT knee point voltage (volts),
VK ≥ 4 * Ιs1 * Rs
where
Rs = Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms),
Ιf = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts),
VA x ALF
Vk = + ALF x Ιn x Rct
Ιn
where
Vk = Required kneepoint voltage
VA = Current transformer rated burden (VA)
ALF = Accuracy limit factor
Ιn = Current transformer secondary rated current (A)
15 x 10
Vk = + 10 x 5 x 0.2
5
= 40V
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes
The ANSI/IEEE “C” Class standard voltage rating required will be lower than
an IEC knee point voltage. This is because the ANSI/IEEE voltage rating is
defined in terms of useful output voltage at the terminals of the CT, whereas
the IEC knee point voltage includes the voltage drop across the internal
resistance of the CT secondary winding added to the useful output. The
IEC/BS knee point is also typically 5% higher than the ANSI/IEEE knee point.
Therefore
Vc = [ Vk - Internal voltage drop ] / 1.05
= [ Vk - (In . RCT . ALF) ] / 1.05
Where
Vc = “C” Class standard voltage rating
Vk = IEC Knee point voltage required
Ιn = CT rated current = 5A in USA
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
(for 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn)
ALF = The CT accuracy limit factor, the rated dynamic current output of a "C"
class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In
The IEC accuracy limit factor is identical to the 20 times secondary current ANSI/IEEE
rating.
Therefore
Vc = [ Vk - (100 . RCT ) ] / 1.05
Table 37
Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ this cell will
continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay
was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output
relays.
Monitor Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor/ Download Port Pin 11 12 15 13 20 21 23 24
Table 38
THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED
AGAINST INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT
SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS.
WHEN THE ‘TEST MODE’ CELL IS SET TO ‘ENABLED’ THE RELAY SCHEME
LOGIC DOES NOT DRIVE THE OUTPUT RELAYS AND HENCE THE
PROTECTION WILL NOT TRIP THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT BREAKER IF A FAULT
OCCURS.
HOWEVER, THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS WITH REMOTE RELAYS
REMAIN ACTIVE WHICH, IF SUITABLE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN,
COULD LEAD TO THE REMOTE ENDS TRIPPING WHEN CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS ARE ISOLATED OR INJECTION TESTS ARE PERFORMED.
RELAY DESCRIPTION
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description
CONTENT
2. HARDWARE MODULES 5
2.1 Processor board 5
2.2 Internal communication buses 6
2.3 Input module 6
2.3.1 Transformer board 6
2.3.2 Input board 6
2.3.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs 8
2.4 Power supply module (including output relays) 8
2.4.1 Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface) 8
2.4.2 Output relay board 9
2.5 RTD board 9
2.6 IRIG-B board 9
2.7 Mechanical layout 10
2.8 Second rear communications board 10
2.9 Current loop input output board (CLIO) 11
3. RELAY SOFTWARE 13
3.1 Real-time operating system 13
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description
Battery
Flash
backed-up E 2PROM SRAM
EPROM
SRAM
Timing data
Fibre optic
rear comms
port optional
Opto-isolated
inputs
Relay board ADC Input
board
P0126ENa
2. HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a
separate function within the relay’s operation. This section describes the functional
operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1 Processor board
The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs
all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the
data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad
and LEDs.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description
The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which allows the
LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel
communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for EIA(RS)232 serial
communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin
D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is
handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM
which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data
storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-volatile memory is
sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software
code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the
storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data, and 32kB of
E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting
values.
2.2 Internal communication buses
The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different
modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The
ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals
and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor
board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves.
The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital
sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP
processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the
serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
2.3 Input module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and the
analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module of P342
consists of two PDBs; the main input board and the transformer board. This relay
provides four voltage inputs and five current inputs. The P343 input module contains
an additional transformer board, providing a total of four voltage inputs and eight
current inputs.
2.3.1 Transformer board
The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up
to five current transformers (CTs). The auxiliary transformer board adds up to four
more CTs. The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and
wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either 110V or 440V
nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both to step-down the
currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to
provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection
arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide
differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.
2.3.2 Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the
analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and
VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the
samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the
analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33
Anti-alias filters
Low 8 digital inputs
Diffn Optical Optical
VT to pass 8
single isolator isolator
filter
3/4 voltage inputs
Transformer board
Noise 8 Noise
4 4 4 filter filter
board
Input
Parallel bus
Buffer
Diffn Low
VT to pass
single filter
Diffn Low
CT to pass Multiplexer
single filter
16-bit Serial
16:1
Buffer
ADC interface
Serial sample
data bus
Up to 5 current inputs
Sample
control Trigger from processor
Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 board
Calibration
E2 PROM
Parallel bus
Diffn Low
CT to pass
single filter
P0127ENa
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
OPTO CONFIG
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,
Global Nominal V 24-27
Custom
Opto Input 1 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated
power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels
are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, ±16V for the analogue
electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils and the
RTD board if fitted. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are
distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is
provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought
out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically
isolated digital inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the EIA(RS)485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The EIA(RS)485
interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide communication
using one of either Courier, Modbus, or IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 protocols. The
EIA(RS)485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical
isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal
communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output
relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are provided
to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
2.4.2 Output relay board
There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally
open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, six normally
open contacts and two changeover contacts.
For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays’ state is written to
or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than
seven output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay
boards. Each additional relay board provides a further seven or eight output relays.
2.5 RTD board
The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) board is an order option. It is used to
monitor the temperature readings from up to ten PT100 RTDs which are each
connected using a 3-wire connection. The board is powered from the 22V power rail
that is used to drive the output relays. The RTD board includes two redundant
channels which are connected to high stability resistors to provide reference readings.
These are used to check the operation of the RTD board. The temperature data is
read by the processor via the parallel data bus, and is used to provide thermal
protection of the generator windings.
2.6 IRIG-B board
The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing
reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The
IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay.
The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s internal real-time clock to an
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description
accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event,
fault maintenance and disturbance records.
The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which
can be used for the rear communication port instead of the EIA(RS)485 electrical
connection (IEC60870 only).
2.7 Mechanical layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a
conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints
giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the
presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing
strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit
noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring
clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital
logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear
communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin
and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data
communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the
board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and
12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
2.8 Second rear communications board
For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear
communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications
port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three
physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485
(connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.
The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they
use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms
board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout
of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3.
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33
Courier always
The I/O connectors accommodate wire sizes in the range 1/0.85mm (0.57mm2) to
1/1.38mm (1.5mm2) and their multiple conductor equivalents. The use of screened
cable is recommended. The screen terminations should be connected to the case
earth of the relay.
Basic Insulation (300V) is provided between analogue inputs/outputs and earth and
between analogue inputs and outputs. However, there is no insulation between one
input and another or one output and another.
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 2
0-1mA channel 2
Screen channel 2 Common return channel 2
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 3
0-1mA channel 3
Screen channel 3
Common return channel 3
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 4
Screen channel 4 0-1mA channel 4
Common return channel 4
Inputs
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 1
0-1mA channel 1
Screen channel 1 Common channel 1
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 2
0-1mA channel 2
Screen channel 2 Common channel 2
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 3
0-1mA channel 3
Screen channel 3
Common channel 3
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 4
Screen channel 4 0-1mA channel 4
Common channel 4
3. RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this
section. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:
• the real-time operating system
• the system services software
• the platform software
• the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the
protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of
the relay. Figure 5 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection
Programable & task
fixed scheme logic
Platform Software
Fourier signal Protection
Event, fault, Remote
processing algorithms
disturbance, communications
maintenance record interface -
logging IEC60870-5-103
Supervisor task
Protection & control settings
Settings Remote
communications
database
interface - Modbus
Sampling function -
copies samples into
2 cycle buffer Control of output contacts and Front panel Local & Remote
programmable LEDs interface - LCD & communications
keypad interface - Courier
Relay hardware
P0128ENa
any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection
response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the
start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and
the platform software.
3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling
After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there
are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is
controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system services software
and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-
cycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number
of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P342 and
P343 generator protection relays, the protection task is executed four times per cycle,
i.e. after every 6 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by
the relay. However, the protection elements are split into groups so that different
elements are processed each time, with every element being processed at least once
per cycle. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its
processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software
tasks to take place.
3.4.2 Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-
isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are
checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change
in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it
is registered with the protection & control software.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive
Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting
a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value of the
frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to
achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The
value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection & control task.
When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates
the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are
calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT
is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the
most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency
fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase
angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an
accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective
filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in
conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering
to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to
maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the
input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed
by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module are
also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform
recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering
purposes.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description
message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery
backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is
slower than the supervisor’s buffer. This means that the protection software is not
delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in
the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short
period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full
before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM.
If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task
instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance
record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be triggered
by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a
maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. See also the section
on self supervision & diagnostics later in this section.
3.4.5 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control
task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of
up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of
10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection &
control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives
into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places
on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever
possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and
compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition.
The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can
also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to
view the recorded data.
TECHNICAL DATA
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
CONTENT
1. RATINGS 7
1.1 Currents 7
1.2 Voltages 7
1.3 Auxiliary voltage 7
1.4 Frequency 8
1.5 ‘Universal’ logic inputs (P340 range) 8
1.6 Output relay contacts 8
1.7 Field voltage 9
1.8 Loop through connections 9
1.9 Wiring requirements 9
2. BURDENS 10
2.1 Current circuit 10
2.2 Voltage circuit 10
2.3 Auxiliary supply 10
2.4 Optically-isolated inputs 10
3. ACCURACY 10
3.1 Reference conditions 10
3.2 Influencing quantities 11
5. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 12
5.1 Performance criteria 12
5.1.1 Class A 13
5.1.2 Class B 13
5.1.3 Class C 13
5.2 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc. 13
5.2.1 DC voltage interruptions 13
5.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations 13
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
6. ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT 17
6.1 Temperature 17
6.2 Humidity 17
6.3 Enclosure protection 17
7. MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT 18
7.1 Performance criteria 18
7.1.1 Severity classes 18
7.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal) 18
7.1.3 Shock and bump 19
7.1.4 Seismic 19
8. EC EMC COMPLIANCE 19
9. EC LVD COMPLIANCE 19
10.1.2 Accuracy 20
10.2 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51) 20
10.2.1 Reset characteristics 22
10.2.2 RI curve 22
10.2.3 Accuracy 23
10.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance) 26
10.3.1 Accuracy 26
10.4 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N) 26
10.4.1 Setting ranges 26
10.4.2 Time delay settings 26
10.4.2.1 Accuracy 27
10.4.3 IDG curve 27
10.5 Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N) 28
10.5.1 Setting ranges 28
10.5.2 Time delay settings 28
10.5.3 Accuracy 29
10.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N) 29
10.6.1 SEF accuracy 29
10.6.2 Wattmetric SEF accuracy 29
10.6.3 Polarising quantities accuracy 30
10.7 100% Stator earth fault {P343} 30
10.7.1 Accuracy 31
10.8 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) 31
10.8.1 Accuracy 32
10.9 Transient overreach and overshoot 32
10.9.1 Accuracy 32
10.10 Under impedance (21) 32
10.10.1 Accuracy 32
10.11 Under voltage (27) 33
10.11.1 Level settings 33
10.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics 33
10.11.3 Accuracy 33
10.12 Over voltage (59) 34
10.12.1 Level settings 34
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
1. RATINGS
1.1 Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms.
Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of
each winding sharing one terminal.
Duration Withstand
Continuous rating 4 Ιn
10 minutes 4.5 Ιn
5 minutes 5 Ιn
3 minutes 6 Ιn
2 minutes 7 Ιn
10 seconds 30 Ιn
1 second 100 Ιn
1.2 Voltages
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms.
Withstand Withstand
Duration
(Vn = 100/120V) (Vn = 380/480V)
Continuous (2Vn) 240Vph - ph rms 880Vph - ph rms
10 seconds (2.6Vn) 312Vph - ph rms 1144Vph - ph rms
Operative dc Operative ac
Nominal Ranges
Range Range
24 – 48V dc 19 to 65V -
48 – 110V dc (30 – 100V ac rms) ** 37 to 150V 24 to 110V
110 – 240V dc (100 – 240V ac rms) ** 87 to 300V 80 to 265V
1.4 Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 – 60Hz, the operate range is
5Hz – 70Hz.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
OPTO CONFIG
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,
Global Nominal V 24-27
Custom
Opto Input 1 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
All the logic inputs are independent and isolated. Relay type P342 has a base
number of opto inputs of 8 in the 40TE case and 16 in the 60TE case. Relay type
P343 has a base number of opto inputs of 16 in the 60TE case and 24 in the 80TE
case. One optional opto input board or one output relay relay board can be added
to each relay model to increase the number of opto inputs by 8 or relay contacts by
8.
For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
Relay type P342 has a base number of relay contacts of 7 in the 40TE case and 16 in
the 60TE case. Relay type P343 has a base number of relay output contacts of 14 in
the 60TE case and 24 in the 80TE case. One optional output relay board or one
opto input board can be added to each relay model to increase the number of relay
contacts by 8 or opto inputs by 8.
Watchdog Contact
dc: 30W resistive
Break dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
2. BURDENS
3. ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is ±2.5% unless otherwise specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy is
valid over the full setting range.
4.2 Impulse
IEC60255-5:1997
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J
across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit
connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected
together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
5. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
5.1.1 Class A
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.2 Class B
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication. A transitory operation of the output LEDs is
acceptable provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.3 Class C
The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5
seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as
they reset once the relay powers up.
Communications to relay may be suspended during the testing as long as
communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing.
6. ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
6.1 Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1:1990/A2:1994 - Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974/A2:1994 - Dry heat
IEC 60255-6:1988.
6.2 Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Damp heat, steady state, 40° C ± 2° C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% -3%,
duration 56 days.
IEC 60068-2-30:1980.
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55°C ±2°C 93% ±3% RH and 25°C
±3°C 93% ±3% RH.
7. MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Vibration endurance
7.1.4 Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz
x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis
8. EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by
93/68/EEC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
The Competent Body has issued a Technical Certificate and a Declaration of
Conformity has been completed.
The following Generic Standards used to establish conformity:
EN 50081-2:1994
EN 50082-2:1995.
9. EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is
demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
EN 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995
EN 60950:1992/A11 1997
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
Settings Range
Step Size
Mode Percentage Bias/High Impedance/Interturn
Ιs1 0.05 Ιn – 0.5 Ιn 0.01Ιn
k1 0 – 20% 5%
Ιs2 1 Ιn – 5 Ιn 0.1Ιn
k2 20 – 150% 10%
Interturn Ιs_A 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn Ιs_B 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn Ιs_C 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn time delay 0 to 100s 0.01s
10.1.2 Accuracy
IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US
curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
æ K ö
ç
t = T x (Ι/Ι ) α - 1
+ L÷
ç s ÷
è ø
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
æ K ö
t = TD x ç (Ι/Ι ) α - 1
+ L÷
ç s ÷
è ø
where
t = operation time
K = constant
Ι = measured current
ΙS = current threshold setting
α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
T = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT characteristics
K α L
IDMT Curve Description Standard
Constant Constant Constant
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse UK 120 1 0
Rectifier UK 45900 5.6 0
Moderately inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Inverse US-C08 5.95 2 0.18
Short time inverse US-C02 0.16758 0.02 0.11858
The IEC extremely inverse curve becomes definite time at currents greater than 20 x
setting. The IEC standard, very and long time inverse curves become definite time at
currents greater than 30 x setting.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
TD x S
tRESET = in seconds
(1 - M2)
where
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
S = Constant
M = Ι / Ιs
10.2.2 RI curve
The RI curve (electromechanical) has been included in the first stage characteristic
setting options for Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault protections. The curve is
represented by the following equation:
æ 1 ö
ç ÷
t = K x ç 0.339 - æ0.236/ ö ÷ in seconds
è è Mø ø
With K adjustable from 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.05
M = Ι / Ιs
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33
10.2.3 Accuracy
IEC Curves
1000
100
Operating Time (s)
10
Curve 4
Curve 1
Curve 2
Curve 3
0.1
1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (Multiples of Is)
Amercian Curves
100
10
Operating Time (s)
1
Curve 5
Curve 6
Curve 9
Curve 7
Curve 8
10.3.1 Accuracy
The earth fault elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay.
These time delays have an extended range of 0 to 200s, but are otherwise identical
to those of the phase overcurrent definite time delay. The reset time delay is the
same as the phase overcurrent reset time.
10.4.2.1 Accuracy
æ Ι ö
t = 5.8 - 1.35 loge ç ÷ in seconds
è ΙN > Setting ø
where
Ι = measured current
ΙN>Setting = an adjustable setting which defines the start point of the
characteristic
Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the “ΙN>” setting, the
actual relay current threshold is a different setting called “IDG Ιs”. The “IDG Ιs”
setting is set as a multiple of “ΙN>”.
An additional setting “IDG Time” is also used to set the minimum operating time at
high levels of fault current.
Figure 3 illustrates how the IDG characteristic is implemented.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
10
3
IDG Time Setting Range
2
0
1 10 100
I/IN>
P2242ENa
where
K = Time multiplier setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
10.5.3 Accuracy
10.7.1 Accuracy
The reset time inverse time characteristics for IEEE/US curves are the same as the
phase overcurrent.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
10.8.1 Accuracy
10.10.1 Accuracy
where
K = Time multiplier setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
where
K = Time multiplier setting
T = Operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
10.13.1 Accuracy
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track (20Hz/second)
10.14 Over frequency (81O)
10.14.1 Accuracy
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track 20Hz/second)
10.15 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)
10.15.1 Accuracy
10.16 Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)
10.16.1 Accuracy
10.17.1 Accuracy
10.18.1 Accuracy
10.19.1 Accuracy
10.20.1 Accuracy
10.21.1 Accuracy
10.22.1 Accuracy
10.22.2 Hysteresis
Hysteresis is applied to the lenticular characteristic and to the blinder as soon as they
pick up individually. Hysteresis is not required for the reactance line as Zone 1 or
Zone 2 is determined at a single point when the locus traverses the blinder.
For the lens, the hysteresis consists of an angle of 5° subtracted from the α setting to
increase the lens size and an increment of 5% applied to ZA and ZB to extend the
reach.
Hysteresis for the blinder is dependant on the mode of operation. For generating
mode, the blinder is adjusted to the right, for motoring mode, the blinder is adjusted
to the left, with a distance which is equivalent to an angle separation of 175°. This is
shown in Figure 4. This distance is equivalent to (ZA + ZB) / 2*tan87.5°.
For both characteristics the hysteresis is reset when the impedance locus leaves the
lens.
Blinder
X
Hysteresis for motoring mode
175°
P2190ENa
10.23.1 Accuracy
11.1.1 Accuracy
11.2.1 Accuracy
12.2 Accuracy
13.1 Measurements
Accuracy under reference conditions.
13.2.2 Performance
Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Current Magnitude IA Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
IN Measured Mag
Sensitive Current I Sen Magnitude A 0 to 2A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Input Magnitude
Phase Sequence I1 Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Current I2 Magnitude
Components I0 Magnitude
RMS Phase Currents IA RMS* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB RMS*
IC RMS*
P-P Voltage VAB Magnitude V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 140V
Magnitude VBC Magnitude
VCA Magnitude
P-N voltage VAN Magnitude V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VBN Magnitude
VCN Magnitude
Neutral Voltage VN Measured Mag V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VN Derived Mag
3rd Harmonic VN 3rd Harmonic V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Neutral Voltage
Phase Sequence V1 Magnitude* V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltage V2 Magnitude
Components V0 Magnitude
RMS Phase Voltages VAN RMS* V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
VBN RMS*
VCN RMS*
Frequency Frequency Hz 0 to 70Hz 0.01Hz 45Hz 65Hz
3 Ph Active Power 3 Phase Watts* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
to
6000W
3 Ph Reactive Power 3 Phase Vars* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
to
6000Var
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data
Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
3 Ph Apparent 3 Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 300VA
Power to
6000VA
3 Ph Power Factor 3Ph Power Factor* - -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Single Phase Active A Phase Watts* W -2000W 1W 0W 100W
Power B Phase Watts* to
C Phase Watts* 2000W
Single Phase A Phase Vars* Var -2000Var 1Var 0Var 100Var
Reactive Power B Phase Vars* to
C Phase Vars* 2000Var
Single Phase A Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 100VA
Apparent Power B Phase VA* to
C Phase VA* 2000VA
Single Phase Power APh Power Factor* -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Factor BPh Power Factor*
CPh Power Factor*
3 Phase Current IA Fixed Demand* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Demands IB Fixed Demand*
IC Fixed Demand*
IA Roll Demand*
IB Roll Demand*
IC Roll Demand*
IA Peak Demand*
IB Peak Demand*
IC Peak Demand*
3Ph Active Power 3Ph W Fix Demand* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
Demands 3Ph W Roll Dem* to
3Ph W Peak Dem* 6000W
3Ph Reactive Power 3Ph Vars Fix Dem* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Demands 3Ph Var Roll Dem* to
3Ph Var Peak Dem* 6000Var
Rotor Thermal State NPS Thermal % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
Stator Thermal Thermal Overload % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
RTD Temperatures RTD 1* °C -40°C 0.1°C 0°C 200°C
RTD 2* to
RTD 3* 300°C
RTD 4*
RTD 5*
RTD 6*
RTD 7*
RTD 8*
RTD 9*
RTD 10*
Current Loop Inputs CL Input 1 - -9999 0.1 0 9999
CL Input 2 to
CL Input 3 9999
CL input 4
Note 2: The polarity of Watts, Vars and power factor is affected by the
Measurements Mode setting.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33
Note 3: These settings are for nominal 1A and 100/120V versions only.
For other nominal versions they need to be multiplied
accordingly.
Note 4: For the P343, the IA/IB/IC Current magnitudes are IA-1
Magnitude, IB-1 Magnitude, IC-1 Magnitude.
13.3.1 Accuracy
With the current loop input set to instantaneous operation, two consecutive
acquisitions of data are required for an operate decision to be made.
13.3.2 Other specifications
14.2 Accuracy
15.1.3 Accuracy
1.2
Power frequency (eg 50/60 Hz)
Magnitude (per unit)
1
Combined response of fourier
and anti-aliasing filters
0.8
0.6
Anti-aliasing filter response
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Harmonic
P1124ENa
Setting
Protocol Courier
Message format IEC 60870-5 FT1.2
Baud rate 19 200 bits/s
19.2.1 Performance
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION 5
2 COURIER INTERFACE 5
2.1 Courier protocol 5
2.2 Front courier port 6
2.3 Supported command set 6
2.4 Relay courier database 7
2.5 Setting changes 8
2.5.1 Method 1 8
2.5.2 Method 2 8
2.5.3 Relay settings 8
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode 9
2.6 Event extraction 9
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction 9
2.6.2 Event types 9
2.6.3 Event format 10
2.6.4 Manual event record extraction 10
2.7 Disturbance record extraction 10
2.8 Programmable scheme logic settings 11
3 MODBUS INTERFACE 12
3.1 Communication link 12
3.2 MODBUS functions 12
3.3 Response codes 13
3.4 Register mapping 13
3.5 Event extraction 13
3.5.1 Manual selection 14
3.5.2 Automatic extraction 14
3.5.3 Record data 14
3.6 Disturbance record extraction 15
3.6.1 Manual selection 15
3.6.2 Automatic extraction 16
3.6.3 Record data 16
3.7 Setting changes 16
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications
4 IEC60870-5-103 interface 21
4.1 Physical connection and link layer 21
4.2 Initialisation 21
4.3 Time synchronisation 21
4.4 Spontaneous events 22
4.5 General interrogation 22
4.6 Cyclic measurements 22
4.7 Commands 22
4.8 Test mode 22
4.9 Disturbance records 22
4.10 Blocking of monitor direction 23
5 DNP3 INTERFACE 23
5.1 DNP3 protocol 23
5.2 DNP3 menu setting 23
5.3 Object 1 binary inputs 23
5.4 Object 10 binary outputs 24
5.5 Object 20 binary counters 24
5.6 Object 30 analogue input 24
5.7 DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1 25
5.7.1 Object 1 25
5.7.2 Object 20 25
5.7.3 Object 30 25
1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail to
allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been outlined
in earlier sections, the relay supports a choice of one of four protocols via the rear
communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface and 2nd rear
communications port, which supports the Courier protocol only.
The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to
32 relays can be ‘daisy chained’ together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
For each of the protocol options, the supported functions/commands will be listed
together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures such as
extraction of event, fault and disturbance records, or setting changes, will also be
described.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to
fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be
referred to for this information. This section serves to describe the specific
implementation of the protocol in the relay.
2 COURIER INTERFACE
1 This port is actually compliant to EIA(RS)574; the 9-pin version of EIA(RS)232, see www.tiaonline.org.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33
Send Block
Store Block Identifier
Store Block Footer
Menu Browsing
Get Column Headings
Get Column Text
Get Column Values
Get Strings
Get Text
Get Value
Get Column Setting Limits
Setting Changes
Enter Setting Mode
Preload Setting
Abort Setting
Execute Setting
Reset Menu Cell
Set Value
Control Commands
Select Setting Group
Change Device Address*
Set Real Time
Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front
Courier port.
• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Step size
• Password Level required to allow setting changes
• String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)
To action setting changes stored in the scratchpad the Save Changes cell in the
Configuration column must be written to. This allows the changes to either be
confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory, or the setting changes to be aborted.
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode
If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within the
Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03) when set
to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made, with the relay
set in this mode, are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and support
settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are verified
and stored in non-volatile memory.
2.6 Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either
Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order
using the standard Courier event mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if
appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults, or
maintenance data at random from the stored records.
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction
(See Chapter 7 Courier User Guide, publication R6512)
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced. It is only supported via the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay, the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
2.6.2 Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
− Change of state of output contact
− Change of state of opto input
− Protection element operation
− Alarm condition
− Setting Change
− Password entered/timed-out
− Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
− Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, already extracted older
records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more
recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit
of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance
records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file
extracted from the relay is in a compressed format. It will be necessary to use
MiCOM S1 to de-compress this file and save the disturbance record in the
COMTRADE format.
As has been stated, the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port
does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be
extracted manually from this port.
3 MODBUS INTERFACE
The MODBUS interface is a master/slave protocol and it is defined by MODBUS.org:
See
www.modbus.org
MODBUS Serial Protocol Reference Guide: PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
Event MODBUS
Length Comments
Description Address
Time and Date 30103 4 See G12 data type description in section
3.8.
Event Type 30107 1 See G13 data type. Indicates type of event
Event Value 30108 2 Nature of Value depends on Event Type.
This will contain the status as a binary flag
for Contact, Opto, Alarm, and protection
events.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33
Event MODBUS
Length Comments
Description Address
MODBUS 30110 1 This indicates the MODBUS Register
Address address where the change occurred.
Alarm 30011
Relays 30723
Optos 30725
Protection events – Like the Relay and
Opto addresses this will map onto the
MODBUS address of the appropriate DDB
status register depending on which bit of
the DDB the change occurred. These will
range from 30727 to 30785.
For Platform events, Fault events and
Maintenance events the default is 0.
Event Index 30111 1 This register will contain the DDB ordinal
for protection events or the bit number for
alarm events. The direction of the change
will be indicated by the most significant bit;
1 for 0 – 1change and 0 for 1 – 0 change.
Additional 30112 1 0 means that there is no additional data.
Data Present 1 means fault record data can be read
from 30113 to 30199 (number of registers
depends on the product).
2 means maintenance record data can be
read from 30036 to 30039.
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual
mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above. The
event record data in registers 30103 to 30111 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401(G6 data type) to clear independently the stored
relay event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to
reset the relay indications which has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear
key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu.
The seven bytes of the structure are packed into four 16-bit registers, such that byte 1
is transmitted first, followed by byte 2 through to byte 7, followed by a null (zero) byte
to make eight bytes in total. Since register data is usually transmitted in big-endian
format (high order byte followed by low order byte), byte 1 will be in the high-order
byte position followed by byte 2 in the low-order position for the first register. The
last register will contain just byte 7 in the high order position and the low order byte
will have a value of zero.
Bit Position
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0
2 m15 m14 m13 m12 m11 m10 m9 m8
3 IV R I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0
4 SU R R H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
5 W2 W1 W0 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
6 R R R R M3 M2 M1 M0
7 R Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Where:
− m = 0…59,999ms
− I = 0…59 minutes
− H = 0…23 Hours
− W = 1…7 Day of week; Monday to Sunday, 0 for not calculated
− D = 1…31 Day of Month
− M = 1…12 Month of year; January to December
− Y = 0…99 Years (year of century)
− R = Reserved bit = 0
− SU = summertime: 0=standard time, 1=summer time
− IV = invalid value: 0=valid, 1=invalid
− range = 0ms…99 years
The summertime bit is used to indicate that summertime (day light saving) is being
used and, more importantly, to resolve the alias and time discontinuity which occurs
when summertime starts and ends. This is important for the correct time correlation
of time stamped records.
The day of the week field is optional and if not calculated will be set to zero.
The concept of time zone is not catered for by this data type and hence by the relay.
It is up to the end user to determine the time zone utilised by the relay. Normal
practise is to use UTC (universal co-ordinated time), which avoids the complications
with day light saving time-stamp correlation’s.
3.9 Power & energy measurement data formats (G29 & G125)
The power and energy measurements are available in two data formats; G29 integer
format and G125 IEEE754 floating point format. For historical reasons the registers
listed in the main part of the “Measurements 2” column of the menu database (see
P34x/EN GC) are of the G29 format. The floating point, G125, versions appear at
the end of the column.
3.9.1 Data type G29
Data type G29 consists of three registers. The first register is the per unit power or
energy measurement and is of type G28, which is a signed 16 bit quantity. The
second and third registers contain a multiplier to convert the per unit value to a real
value. The multiplier is of type G27, which is an unsigned 32-bit quantity. Thus, the
overall value conveyed by the G29 data type must be calculated as G29=G28×G27.
The relay calculates the G28 per unit power or energy value as G28=((measured
secondary quantity) / (CT secondary) × (110V / (VT secondary)). Since data type G28
is a signed 16-bit integer, its dynamic range is constrained to ±32768. This
limitation should be borne in mind for the energy measurements, as the G29 value
will saturate a long time before the equivalent G125 does.
The associated G27 multiplier is calculated as G27=(CT primary) × (VT primary /
110V) when primary value measurements are selected, and as G27=(CT secondary)
× (VT secondary / 110V) when secondary value measurements are selected.
Due to the required truncations from floating point values to integer values in the
calculations of the G29 component parts and its limited dynamic range, the use of
the G29 values is only recommended when the MODBUS master cannot deal with
the G125 IEEE754 floating point equivalents.
Note that the G29 values must be read in whole multiples of three registers. It is not
possible to read the G28 and G27 parts with separate read commands.
Example:
For A-Phase Power (Watts) (registers 30300 - 30302) for a 110V relay, In = 1A, VT
ratio = 110V:110V and CT ratio = 1A:1A.
Applying A-phase 1A @ 63.51V
A-phase Watts = ((63.51V × 1A) / In=1A) × (110/Vn=110V) = 63.51 Watts
The G28 part of the value is the truncated per unit quantity, which will be equal to 64
(40h).
The multiplier is derived from the VT and CT ratios set in the relay, with the equation
((CT Primary) × (VT Primary) / 110V). Thus, the G27 part of the value will equal 1.
Hence the overall value of the G29 register set is 64×1 = 64W
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications
4 IEC60870-5-103 interface
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not
supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
− Initialisation (Reset)
− Time Synchronisation
− Event Record Extraction
− General Interrogation
− Cyclic Measurements
− General Commands
− Disturbance Record Extraction
− Private Codes
4.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or
Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is
described in the IEC60870-5-103 section of the menu database, P34x/EN GC.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.
4.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the menu database, P34x/EN GC.
The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of
transmission (COT) indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.
5 DNP3 INTERFACE
binary input points can also be read as change events via object 2 and object 60 for
class 1-3 event data.
Any analogue measurement that is unavailable at the time it is read will be reported
as offline, e.g. the frequency when the current and voltage frequency is outside the
tracking range of the relay or the thermal state when the thermal protection is
disabled in the configuration column. Note that all object 30 points are reported as
secondary values in DNP3 (with respect to CT and VT ratios).
If both rear communications ports are connected to the same bus, care should be
taken to ensure their address settings are not the same, to avoid message conflicts.
Pin Connection
1 No Connection
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR#
5 Ground
6 No Connection
7 RTS#
8 CTS#
9 No Connection
Pin* Connection
4 EIA(RS)485 – 1 (+ ve)
7 EIA(RS)485 – 2 (- ve)
For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the
relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050*, P342------0060* and
P343------0010*, P343------0020*, P343------0030*, P343------0040*,
P343------0050*, P343------0060* are not supported by this menu
database, see TG8614A (0010), TG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN T/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN T/D22 (0060) for information on
the menu database for these software versions).
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 1 247 1 1 * * * Build = Modbus. Default Modbus address is 1
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 254 1 1 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 65534 1 1 * * * Build=DNP 3.0
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Courier
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38m 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38v 19200 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38d 19200 bits/s Setting 0 5 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Measure't Period 06 Courier Number (Time) 15 Setting 1 60 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build=IEC60870-5-103 and Fibre Optic Board
Physical Link 07 Indexed String G21 RS485 Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
fitted
Time Sync 08 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build=DNP 3.0 visible when IRIG-B is disabled
Data Types
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G35)
i.e. Setting value = (setting minimum) + ((register value) x (setting step size))
G3 1 Register ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS (2 characters per register) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0xFF00 First character in high order 8 bits
0x00FF Second character in low order 8 bits
G4 2 Registers PLANT STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000008 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000010 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000020 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000040 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000080 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000100 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000200 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000400 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000800 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00001000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00002000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00004000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00008000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00010000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00020000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00040000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00080000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00100000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00200000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00400000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00800000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x01000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x02000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x04000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x08000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x10000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x20000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x40000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x80000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G5 2 Registers CONTROL STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
IEC60870-5-4 "Binary Time 2a" format - see Section 3.8 of SCADA Communications
Bit Mask (hex)
(P34x/EN CT) of Technical Guide
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
0x0001 Start A
0x0002 Start B
0x0004 Start C
0x0008 Start N
0x0010 Trip A
0x0020 Trip B
0x0040 Trip C
0x0080 Trip N
G17 1 Register IRIG-B STATUS * * *
Value
0 Card not fitted
1 Card failed
2 Signal healthy
3 No signal
G18 1 Register RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER (MODBUS) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0000 No Operation
0x0001 Select next event
0x0002 Accept Event
0x0004 Select next Disturbance Record
0x0008 Accept disturbance record
0x0010 Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 1 Register LANGUAGE * * *
Value
0 English
1 Francais
2 Deutsch
3 Espanol
G20 2 Registers PASSWORD (4 Characters packed into 32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G3
0xFF00 First register, first password character
0x00FF First register, second password character
0xFF00 Second register, third password character
0x00FF Second register, fourth password character
NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS
INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD
SECURITY.
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
2 IDMT
G24 2 Registers UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (32 Bits) * * *
Data formatted as per data type G27
i.e. divide 'G27' value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Current 0 - 4,000,000A Resolution 1mA
Voltage 0 - 4MV Resolution 1mV
G25 1 Register UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (16 Bits) * * *
i.e. divide register value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Time Interval 0.000 - 655.000s Resolution 1ms
Frequency 0.000 - 655.000Hz Resolution 0.001Hz
G26 1 Register MODBUS RELAY STATUS REGISTER * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 In Service Status (1= In service, 0= Out of service)
0x0002 Minor self test failure (=1, 0 otherwise)
0x0004 New auto-extraction event available (=1, 0 otherwise)
Time Synchronised (=1 after Modbus time synch. Resets to 0 after 5 minutes unless re-time
0x0008
synch'd. Other time synch sources do not affect this bit.)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
6 IC * *
6 IC-1 *
7 IN * *
8 IN Sensitive * * *
9 IA-2 *
10 IB-2 *
11 IC-2 *
G32 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORD DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR * * *
Value
0 Not used (i.e. nothing recorded for the channel)
1 onwards See separate G32 DDB Table
G33 NOT USED
G34 1 Register TRIGGER MODE * * *
Value
0 Single
1 Extended
G35 2 Registers NUMERIC SETTING (Unsigned 32 Bit) * * *
Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G2)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
5 38400 bits/s
G39 1 Register COMMUNICATIONS PARITY * * *
Value
0 Odd
1 Even
2 None
G40 1 Register CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION
Value
0 A-N
1 B-N
2 C-N
3 A-B
4 B-C
5 C-A
G41 1 Register CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING
Value
0 None
1 Undervoltage
2 Differential
3 Both
G42 1 Register CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL
Value
0 None
1 Timer
2 Frequency
3 Both
G43 1 Register IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IEC S Inverse
3 IEC V Inverse
4 IEC E Inverse
5 UK LT Inverse
6 IEEE M Inverse
7 IEEE V Inverse
8 IEEE E Inverse
9 US Inverse
10 US ST Inverse
G44 1 Register DIRECTION * * *
Value
0 Non-Directional
1 Directional Fwd
2 Directional Rev
G45 1 Register VTS BLOCK * * *
Value
0 Block
1 Non-Directional
G46 1 Register POLARISATION *
Value
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
0 Zero Sequence
1 Neg Sequence
G47 1 Register MEASURING MODE * * *
Value
0 Phase-Phase
1 Phase-Neutral
G48 1 Register OPERATION MODE * * *
Value
0 Any Phase
1 Three Phase
G49 1 Register VN OR IN INPUT * * *
Value
0 Measured
1 Derived
G50 1 Register RTD SELECT * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD Input #1
0x0002 RTD Input #2
0x0004 RTD Input #3
0x0008 RTD Input #4
0x0010 RTD Input #5
0x0020 RTD Input #6
0x0040 RTD Input #7
0x0080 RTD Input #8
0x0100 RTD Input #9
0x0200 RTD Input #10
G51 1 Register FAULT LOCATION
Value
0 Distance
1 Ohms
2 % of Line
G52 1 Register DEFAULT DISPLAY * * *
Value
0 3Ph + N Current
1 3 Ph-neutral Voltage
2 Power
3 Date and Time
4 Description
5 Plant Reference
6 Frequency
7 Access Level
G53 1 Register SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 All Settings
2 Setting Group 1
3 Setting Group 2
4 Setting Group 3
5 Setting Group 4
G54 1 Register SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Value
0 Primary
1 Secondary
G55 1 Register CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Trip
2 Close
G56 1 Register PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE * * *
Value
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 IA
4 IB
5 IC
G57 1 Register DATA TRANSFER DOMAIN * * *
Value
0 PSL Settings
1 PSL Configuration
G58 1 Register SEF/REF SELECTION
Value
0 SEF * * *
1 SEF cos(PHI) * * *
2 SEF sin(PHI) * * *
3 Wattmetric * * *
4 Hi Z REF * * *
5 Lo Z REF * *
6 Lo Z REF+SEF * *
7 Lo Z REF+Wattmet * *
G59 1 Register BATTERY STATUS * * *
Value
0 Dead
1 Healthy
G60 1 Register TIME DELAY SELECTION * * *
Value
0 DT
1 Inverse
G61 1 Register ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL * * *
Value
0 Select via Menu
1 Select via Opto
G62 1 Register SAVE AS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Save
2 Abort
G63 1 Register IN> FUNCTION LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 IN>1 VTS Block *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
3 Pulse Set
G71 1 Register PROTOCOL * * *
Value
0 Courier
1 IEC870-5-103
2 Modbus
G72 1 Register START DEAD TIME
Value
0 Protection Reset
1 CB Trips
G73 1 Register RECLAIM TIME if PROTECTION START
Value
0 Suspend
1 Continue
G74 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT
Value
0 User Interface
1 Select NonAuto
G75 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE AFTER CONTROL CLOSE
Value
0 Enabled
1 Inhibited
G76 1 Register TRANSFER MODE * * *
Value
0 Prepare Rx
1 Complete Rx
2 Prepare Tx
3 Complete Tx
4 Rx Prepared
5 Tx Prepared
6 OK
7 Error
G77 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE
Value
0 Out of Service
1 In Service
G78 1 Register A/R TELECONTROL
Value
0 No Operation
1 Auto
2 Non-auto
G79 1 Register CUSTOM SETTINGS * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Basic
2 Complete
G80 1 Register VISIBLE/INVISIBLE * * *
Value
0 Invisible
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
1 Visible
G81 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT BY * * *
Value
0 User Interface
1 CB Close
G82 1 Register A/R PROTECTION BLOCKING
Value
0 No Block
1 Block Inst Prot
G83 1 Register A/R STATUS
Value
0 Auto Mode
1 Non-auto Mode
2 Live Line
G84 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
0x40000000
0x80000000
G85 2 Registers TRIPPED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
0 Disabled
1 Local
2 Remote
3 Local+Remote
4 Opto
5 Opto+local
6 Opto+Remote
7 Opto+Rem+local
G100 NOT USED
G101 1 Register GEN DIFF FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Percentage Bias
2 High Impedance
3 Interturn
G102 1 Register POWER FUNCTION SELECT * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Reverse
2 Low Forward
3 Over
G103 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Underimpedance
2 Volt controlled
3 Volt restrained
G104 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION * *
Value
0 None
1 Delta-Star
G105 1 Register DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
G107 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 2 (32 Bits)
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
1 Over
G155 1 Register CLIO OUTPUT MEASUREMENT
Value Value Value
IA Magnitude 0 0 0
IB Magnitude 1 1 1
IC Magnitude 2 2 2
IN Measured Mag 3 3
IN Derived Mag 3
I Sen Magnitude 4 4 4
I1 Magnitude 5 5 5
I2 Magnitude 6 6 6
I0 Magnitude 7 7 7
IA RMS 8 8 8
IB RMS 9 9 9
IC RMS 10 10 10
VAB Magnitude 11 11 11
VBC Magnitude 12 12 12
VCA Magnitude 13 13 13
VAN Magnitude 14 14 14
VBN Magnitude 15 15 15
VCN Magnitude 16 16 16
VN Measured Mag 17 17 17
VN Derived Mag 18 18 18
V1 Magnitude 19 19 19
V2 Magnitude 20 20 20
V0 Magnitude 21 21 21
VAN RMS 22 22 22
VBN RMS 23 23 23
VCN RMS 24 24 24
Frequency 25 25 25
3 Phase Watts 26 26 26
A Phase Watts 27 27 27
B Phase Watts 28 28 28
C Phase Watts 29 29 29
3 Phase Vars 30 30 30
A Phase Vars 31 31 31
B Phase Vars 32 32 32
C Phase Vars 33 33 33
3 Phase VA 34 34 34
A Phase VA 35 35 35
B Phase VA 36 36 36
C Phase VA 37 37 37
3Ph Power Factor 38 38 38
APh Power Factor 39 39 39
BPh Power Factor 40 40 40
CPh Power Factor 41 41 41
3Ph W Fix Demand 42 42 42
3Ph Vars Fix Dem 43 43 43
IA Fixed Demand 44 44 44
IB Fixed Demand 45 45 45
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
IC Fixed Demand 46 46 46
3 Ph W Roll Dem 47 47 47
3Ph Vars RollDem 48 48 48
IA Roll Demand 49 49 49
IB Roll Demand 50 50 50
IC Roll Demand 51 51 51
3Ph W Peak Dem 52 52 52
3Ph Var Peak Dem 53 53 53
IA Peak Demand 54 54 54
IB Peak Demand 55 55 55
IC Peak Demand 56 56 56
VN 3rd Harmonic 57
NPS Thermal 57 58
Thermal Overload 57 58 59
RTD 1 59 60
RTD 2 60 61
RTD 3 61 62
RTD 4 62 63
RTD 5 63 64
RTD 6 64 65
RTD 7 65 66
RTD 8 66 67
RTD 9 67 68
RTD 10 68 69
CL Input 1 58 69 70
CL Input 2 59 70 71
CL Input 3 60 71 72
CL Input 4 61 72 73
G200 1 Register GLOBAL OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
5 Custom
G201 1 Register SINGLE OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
G202 2 Registers CONTROL INPUT STATUS (32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000002 Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000004 Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000008 Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000010 Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
0 Disabled
1 Monitor Blocking
2 Command Blocking
G228 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 3 (ALARMS 65 - 96) (32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Battery Fail
0x00000002 Field Volt Fail
0x00000004 Unused
0x00000008 GOOSE IED Absent
0x00000010 NIC not fitted
0x00000020 NIC no response
0x00000040 NIC fatal error
0x00000080 NIC Software Reload
0x00000100 Bad TCP/IP Configuration
0x00000200 Bad OSI Configuration
0x00000400 NIC Link Fail
0x00000800 NIC SW-Mismatch
0x00001000 IP addr conflict
0x00002000 Unused
0x00004000 Unused
0x00008000 Unused
0x00010000 Unused
0x00020000 Unused
0x00040000 Unused
0x00080000 Unused
0x00100000 Unused
0x00200000 Unused
0x00400000 Unused
0x00800000 Unused
0x01000000 Unused
0x02000000 Unused
0x04000000 Unused
0x08000000 Unused
0x10000000 Unused
0x20000000 Unused
0x40000000 Unused
0x80000000 Unused
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Frequency Hz 0 70 0.01 45 65
3Ph Vars Fix Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Vars RollDem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Var Peak Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
98 UNUSED
99 UNUSED
100 UNUSED
101 UNUSED
102 UNUSED
103 UNUSED
104 UNUSED
105 UNUSED
106 UNUSED
107 UNUSED
108 UNUSED
109 UNUSED
110 UNUSED
111 UNUSED
112 UNUSED
113 UNUSED
114 UNUSED
115 UNUSED
116 UNUSED
117 UNUSED
118 UNUSED
119 UNUSED
120 UNUSED
121 UNUSED
122 UNUSED
123 UNUSED
124 UNUSED
125 UNUSED
126 UNUSED
127 UNUSED
128 UNUSED
129 UNUSED
130 UNUSED
131 UNUSED
132 UNUSED
133 UNUSED
134 UNUSED
135 UNUSED
136 UNUSED
137 UNUSED
138 UNUSED
139 UNUSED
140 UNUSED
141 UNUSED
142 UNUSED
143 UNUSED
144 UNUSED
145 UNUSED
146 UNUSED
147 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
148 UNUSED
149 UNUSED
150 UNUSED
151 UNUSED
152 UNUSED
153 UNUSED
154 UNUSED
155 UNUSED
156 UNUSED
157 UNUSED
158 UNUSED
159 UNUSED
160 PSL Relay Conditioner 1 Relay Cond 1 * * *
161 PSL Relay Conditioner 2 Relay Cond 2 * * *
162 PSL Relay Conditioner 3 - Any Trip Any Trip * * *
163 PSL Relay Conditioner 4 Relay Cond 4 * * *
164 PSL Relay Conditioner 5 Relay Cond 5 * * *
165 PSL Relay Conditioner 6 Relay Cond 6 * * *
166 PSL Relay Conditioner 7 Relay Cond 7 * * *
167 PSL Relay Conditioner 8 Relay Cond 8 * * *
168 PSL Relay Conditioner 9 Relay Cond 9 * * *
169 PSL Relay Conditioner 10 Relay Cond 10 * * *
170 PSL Relay Conditioner 11 Relay Cond 11 * * *
171 PSL Relay Conditioner 12 Relay Cond 12 * * *
172 PSL Relay Conditioner 13 Relay Cond 13 * * *
173 PSL Relay Conditioner 14 Relay Cond 14 * * *
174 PSL Relay Conditioner 15 Relay Cond 15 * * *
175 PSL Relay Conditioner 16 Relay Cond 16 * * *
176 PSL Relay Conditioner 17 Relay Cond 17 * * *
177 PSL Relay Conditioner 18 Relay Cond 18 * * *
178 PSL Relay Conditioner 19 Relay Cond 19 * * *
179 PSL Relay Conditioner 20 Relay Cond 20 * * *
180 PSL Relay Conditioner 21 Relay Cond 21 * * *
181 PSL Relay Conditioner 22 Relay Cond 22 * * *
182 PSL Relay Conditioner 23 Relay Cond 23 * * *
183 PSL Relay Conditioner 24 Relay Cond 24 * * *
184 PSL Relay Conditioner 25 Relay Cond 25 *
185 PSL Relay Conditioner 26 Relay Cond 26 *
186 PSL Relay Conditioner 27 Relay Cond 27 *
187 PSL Relay Conditioner 28 Relay Cond 28 *
188 PSL Relay Conditioner 29 Relay Cond 29 *
189 PSL Relay Conditioner 30 Relay Cond 30 *
190 PSL Relay Conditioner 31 Relay Cond 31 *
191 PSL Relay Conditioner 32 Relay Cond 32 *
192 UNUSED
193 UNUSED
194 UNUSED
195 UNUSED
196 UNUSED
197 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
198 UNUSED
199 UNUSED
200 UNUSED
201 UNUSED
202 UNUSED
203 UNUSED
204 UNUSED
205 UNUSED
206 UNUSED
207 UNUSED
208 UNUSED
209 UNUSED
210 UNUSED
211 UNUSED
212 UNUSED
213 UNUSED
214 UNUSED
215 UNUSED
216 UNUSED
217 UNUSED
218 UNUSED
219 UNUSED
220 UNUSED
221 UNUSED
222 UNUSED
223 UNUSED
224 PSL Timer in 1 Timer in 1 * * *
225 PSL Timer in 2 Timer in 2 * * *
226 PSL Timer in 3 Timer in 3 * * *
227 PSL Timer in 4 Timer in 4 * * *
228 PSL Timer in 5 Timer in 5 * * *
229 PSL Timer in 6 Timer in 6 * * *
230 PSL Timer in 7 Timer in 7 * * *
231 PSL Timer in 8 Timer in 8 * * *
232 UNUSED
233 UNUSED
234 UNUSED
235 UNUSED
236 UNUSED
237 UNUSED
238 UNUSED
239 UNUSED
240 UNUSED
241 UNUSED
242 UNUSED
243 UNUSED
244 UNUSED
245 UNUSED
246 UNUSED
247 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
248 UNUSED
249 UNUSED
250 UNUSED
251 UNUSED
252 UNUSED
253 UNUSED
254 UNUSED
255 UNUSED
256 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 1 Timer out 1 * * *
257 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 2 Timer out 2 * * *
258 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 3 Timer out 3 * * *
259 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 4 Timer out 4 * * *
260 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 5 Timer out 5 * * *
261 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 6 Timer out 6 * * *
262 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 7 Timer out 7 * * *
263 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 8 Timer out 8 * * *
264 UNUSED
265 UNUSED
266 UNUSED
267 UNUSED
268 UNUSED
269 UNUSED
270 UNUSED
271 UNUSED
272 UNUSED
273 UNUSED
274 UNUSED
275 UNUSED
276 UNUSED
277 UNUSED
278 UNUSED
279 UNUSED
280 UNUSED
281 UNUSED
282 UNUSED
283 UNUSED
284 UNUSED
285 UNUSED
286 UNUSED
287 UNUSED
288 PSL Fault Record Trigger Input Fault REC TRIG * * *
289 UNUSED
290 Group Selection Setting Group via Opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid * * *
291 Commission Test Test Mode Enabled Prot'n Disabled * * *
292 VT Supervision VTS Indication VT Fail Alarm * * *
293 CT Supervision CTS Indication CT Fail Alarm * * *
294 Breaker Fail Breaker Fail Any Trip CB Fail Alarm * * *
295 CB Monitoring Broken Current Maintenance Alarm I^ Maint Alarm * * *
296 CB Monitoring Broken Current Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm * * *
297 CB Monitoring Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm CB Ops Maint * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
397 UNUSED
398 UNUSED
399 UNUSED
400 UNUSED
401 UNUSED
402 UNUSED
403 UNUSED
404 UNUSED
405 UNUSED
406 UNUSED
407 UNUSED
408 UNUSED
409 UNUSED
410 UNUSED
411 UNUSED
412 UNUSED
413 UNUSED
414 UNUSED
415 PSL Initiate Test Mode Test Mode * * *
416 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 100% ST EF Trip *
417 Dead Machine Dead Machine Protection Trip DeadMachine Trip *
418 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip 3ph Gen Diff Trip *
419 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip A Gen Diff Trip A *
420 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip B Gen Diff Trip B *
421 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip C Gen Diff Trip C *
422 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip * *
423 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip * *
424 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Trip NPS Trip * *
425 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph V Dep OC Trip * *
426 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A V Dep OC Trip A * *
427 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B V Dep OC Trip B * *
428 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C V Dep OC Trip C * *
429 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Trip V/Hz Trip * *
430 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Trip RTD 1 Trip * *
431 RTD Thermal RTD 2 Trip RTD 2 Trip * *
432 RTD Thermal RTD 3 Trip RTD 3 Trip * *
433 RTD Thermal RTD 4 Trip RTD 4 Trip * *
434 RTD Thermal RTD 5 Trip RTD 5 Trip * *
435 RTD Thermal RTD 6 Trip RTD 6 Trip * *
436 RTD Thermal RTD 7 Trip RTD 7 Trip * *
437 RTD Thermal RTD 8 Trip RTD 8 Trip * *
438 RTD Thermal RTD 9 Trip RTD 9 Trip * *
439 RTD Thermal RTD 10 Trip RTD 10 Trip * *
440 RTD Thermal Any RTD Trip Any RTD Trip * *
440 df/dt Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip df/dt Trip *
441 Voltage Vector Shift Voltage Vector Shift Trip V Shift Trip *
442 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Trip IN>1 Trip * * *
443 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Trip IN>2 Trip * * *
444 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Trip IN>3 Trip *
445 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Trip IN>4 Trip *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
496 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip SPower2 Trip * * *
497 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip *
498 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip *
499 Thermal Overload Thermal Overload Trip Thermal O/L Trip * * *
500 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip * *
501 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip A * *
502 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip B * *
503 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip C * *
504 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip * *
505 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip A * *
506 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip B * *
507 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip C * *
508 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip CL Input 1 Trip * * *
509 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Trip CL Input 2 Trip * * *
510 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Trip CL Input 3 Trip * * *
511 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Trip CL Input 4 Trip * * *
512 UNUSED
513 UNUSED
514 UNUSED
515 UNUSED
516 UNUSED
517 UNUSED
518 UNUSED
519 UNUSED
520 UNUSED
521 UNUSED
522 UNUSED
523 UNUSED
524 UNUSED
525 UNUSED
526 UNUSED
527 UNUSED
528 UNUSED
529 UNUSED
530 UNUSED
531 UNUSED
532 UNUSED
533 UNUSED
534 UNUSED
535 UNUSED
536 UNUSED
537 UNUSED
538 UNUSED
539 UNUSED
540 UNUSED
541 UNUSED
542 UNUSED
543 UNUSED
544 UNUSED
545 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
546 UNUSED
547 UNUSED
548 UNUSED
549 UNUSED
550 UNUSED
551 UNUSED
552 UNUSED
553 UNUSED
554 UNUSED
555 UNUSED
556 UNUSED
557 UNUSED
558 UNUSED
559 UNUSED
560 UNUSED
561 UNUSED
562 UNUSED
563 UNUSED
564 UNUSED
565 UNUSED
566 UNUSED
567 UNUSED
568 UNUSED
569 UNUSED
570 UNUSED
571 UNUSED
572 UNUSED
573 UNUSED
574 UNUSED
575 UNUSED
576 All protection Any Start Any Start * * *
577 Neutral displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Start VN>1 Start * * *
578 Neutral displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start VN>2 Start * * *
579 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<1 Start * * *
580 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<1 Start A/AB * * *
581 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<1 Start B/BC * * *
582 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<1 Start C/CA * * *
583 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<2 Start * * *
584 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<2 Start A/AB * * *
585 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<2 Start B/BC * * *
586 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<2 Start C/CA * * *
587 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>1 Start * * *
588 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>1 Start A/AB * * *
589 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>1 Start B/BC * * *
590 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>1 Start C/CA * * *
591 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>2 Start * * *
592 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>2 Start A/AB * * *
593 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>2 Start B/BC * * *
594 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>2 Start C/CA * * *
595 Power Power Stage 1 Start Power1 Start * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
646 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start PSlipz Z2 Start *
647 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start PSlipz LensStart *
648 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start PSlipz BlindStrt *
649 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start PSlipz ReactStrt *
650 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start * *
651 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start A * *
652 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start B * *
653 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start C * *
654 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start * *
655 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start A * *
656 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start B * *
657 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start C * *
658 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start CLI1 Alarm Start * * *
659 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Alarm Start CLI2 Alarm Start * * *
660 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Alarm Start CLI3 Alarm Start * * *
661 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Alarm Start CLI4 Alarm Start * * *
662 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start CLI1 Trip Start * * *
663 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Trip Start CLI2 Trip Start * * *
664 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Trip Start CLI3 Trip Start * * *
665 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Trip Start CLI4 Trip Start * * *
666 UNUSED
667 UNUSED
668 UNUSED
669 UNUSED
670 UNUSED
671 UNUSED
672 UNUSED
673 UNUSED
674 UNUSED
675 UNUSED
676 UNUSED
677 UNUSED
678 UNUSED
679 UNUSED
680 UNUSED
681 UNUSED
682 UNUSED
683 UNUSED
684 UNUSED
685 UNUSED
686 UNUSED
687 UNUSED
688 UNUSED
689 UNUSED
690 UNUSED
691 UNUSED
692 UNUSED
693 UNUSED
694 UNUSED
695 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
696 UNUSED
697 UNUSED
698 UNUSED
699 UNUSED
700 UNUSED
701 UNUSED
702 UNUSED
703 UNUSED
704 UNUSED
705 UNUSED
706 UNUSED
707 UNUSED
708 UNUSED
709 UNUSED
710 UNUSED
711 UNUSED
712 UNUSED
713 UNUSED
714 UNUSED
715 UNUSED
716 UNUSED
717 UNUSED
718 UNUSED
719 UNUSED
720 UNUSED
721 UNUSED
722 UNUSED
723 UNUSED
724 UNUSED
725 UNUSED
726 UNUSED
727 UNUSED
728 UNUSED
729 UNUSED
730 UNUSED
731 UNUSED
732 UNUSED
733 UNUSED
734 UNUSED
735 UNUSED
736 VT Supervision VTS Fast Block VTS Fast Block * * *
737 VT Supervision VTS Slow Block VTS Slow Block * * *
738 CT Supervision CTS Block CTS Block * * *
739 CB Control Control Trip Control Trip *
740 CB Control Control Close Control Close *
741 CB Control Control Close in Progress Close in Prog *
742 Reconnection Reconnection Time Delay Output Reconnection *
743 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Alarm RTD 1 Alarm * *
744 RTD Thermal RTD 2 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm * *
745 RTD Thermal RTD 3 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
796 UNUSED
797 UNUSED
798 UNUSED
799 UNUSED
800 UNUSED
801 UNUSED
802 UNUSED
803 UNUSED
804 UNUSED
805 UNUSED
806 UNUSED
807 UNUSED
808 UNUSED
809 UNUSED
810 UNUSED
811 UNUSED
812 UNUSED
813 UNUSED
814 UNUSED
815 UNUSED
816 UNUSED
817 UNUSED
818 UNUSED
819 UNUSED
820 UNUSED
821 UNUSED
822 UNUSED
823 UNUSED
824 UNUSED
825 UNUSED
826 UNUSED
827 UNUSED
828 UNUSED
829 UNUSED
830 UNUSED
831 UNUSED
832 CONTROL Control Input 1 Control Input 1 * * *
833 CONTROL Control Input 2 Control Input 2 * * *
834 CONTROL Control Input 3 Control Input 3 * * *
835 CONTROL Control Input 4 Control Input 4 * * *
836 CONTROL Control Input 5 Control Input 5 * * *
837 CONTROL Control Input 6 Control Input 6 * * *
838 CONTROL Control Input 7 Control Input 7 * * *
839 CONTROL Control Input 8 Control Input 8 * * *
840 CONTROL Control Input 9 Control Input 9 * * *
841 CONTROL Control Input 10 Control Input 10 * * *
842 CONTROL Control Input 11 Control Input 11 * * *
843 CONTROL Control Input 12 Control Input 12 * * *
844 CONTROL Control Input 13 Control Input 13 * * *
845 CONTROL Control Input 14 Control Input 14 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
896 UNUSED
897 UNUSED
898 UNUSED
899 UNUSED
900 UNUSED
901 UNUSED
902 UNUSED
903 UNUSED
904 UNUSED
905 UNUSED
906 UNUSED
907 UNUSED
908 UNUSED
909 UNUSED
910 UNUSED
911 UNUSED
912 UNUSED
913 UNUSED
914 UNUSED
915 UNUSED
916 UNUSED
917 UNUSED
918 UNUSED
919 UNUSED
920 UNUSED
921 UNUSED
922 UNUSED
923 UNUSED
924 UNUSED
925 UNUSED
926 UNUSED
927 UNUSED
928 PSLINT PSL Int. 1 * * *
929 PSLINT PSL Int. 2 * * *
930 PSLINT PSL Int. 3 * * *
931 PSLINT PSL Int. 4 * * *
932 PSLINT PSL Int. 5 * * *
933 PSLINT PSL Int. 6 * * *
934 PSLINT PSL Int. 7 * * *
935 PSLINT PSL Int. 8 * * *
936 PSLINT PSL Int. 9 * * *
937 PSLINT PSL Int. 10 * * *
938 PSLINT PSL Int. 11 * * *
939 PSLINT PSL Int. 12 * * *
940 PSLINT PSL Int. 13 * * *
941 PSLINT PSL Int. 14 * * *
942 PSLINT PSL Int. 15 * * *
943 PSLINT PSL Int. 16 * * *
944 PSLINT PSL Int. 17 * * *
945 PSLINT PSL Int. 18 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
This sheet contains all the text used in Events and all other messages
Note: Indentification message in ASDU 5: "ALSTOM P" + 16bit model + 8bit major version + 1 character minor version e.g. "ALSTOM P" + 343 + 06 + 'A'
Status Indications
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 16 Auto-recloser active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 17 Tele-protection active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 18 Protection active *
1 1,7,11,12,20, 21 224 19 LED Reset * * * Reset Indications
1 9,11 224 20 Monitor direction blocked * * * * 391
1 9,11 224 21 Test mode * * * * Protection Disabled 291
1 9,11 224 22 Local parameter setting *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 23 Characteristic 1 * * * * PG1 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 24 Characteristic 2 * * * * PG2 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 25 Characteristic 3 * * * * PG3 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 26 Characteristic 4 * * * * PG4 Changed
1 1,7,9,11 224 27 Auxillary input 1 * * * * Opto Input 1 32
1 1,7,9,11 224 28 Auxillary input 2 * * * * Opto Input 2 33
1 1,7,9,11 224 29 Auxillary input 3 * * * * Opto Input 3 34
1 1,7,9,11 224 30 Auxillary input 4 * * * * Opto Input 4 35
Supervision Indications
1 1,7,9 224 32 Measurand supervision I *
1 1,7,9 224 33 Measurand supervision V *
1 1,7,9 224 35 Phase sequence supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 36 Trip circuit supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 37 I>> back-up supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 38 VT fuse failure * * * * VTS Indication 292
1 1,7,9 224 39 Teleprotection disturbed *
1 1,7,9 224 46 Group warning *
1 1,7,9 224 47 Group alarm *
Earth Fault Indications
1 1,7,9 224 48 Earth Fault L1 *
1 1,7,9 224 49 Earth Fault L2 *
1 1,7,9 224 50 Earth Fault L3 *
1 1,7,9 224 51 Earth Fault Fwd *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
226 88 88
226 89 89
226 90 90
226 91 91
226 92 92
226 93 93
226 94 94
226 95 95
226 96 96
226 97 97
226 98 98
226 99 99
226 100 100
226 101 101
226 102 102
226 103 103
226 104 104
226 105 105
226 106 106
226 107 107
226 108 108
226 109 109
226 110 110
226 111 111
226 112 112
226 113 113
226 114 114
226 115 115
226 116 116
226 117 117
226 118 118
226 119 119
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 41 CB Ops Maint * * * * 297
Alarm
No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 42 CB Ops Lockout * * * * 298
Lockout
Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 43 CB Op Time Maint * * * * 299
Maintenance Alarm
Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 44 CB Op Time Lock * * * * 300
Lockout Alarm
CB Unhealthy on Control
1 1,7 227 49 Man CB Unhealthy * * * 305
Close Alarm
1 1,7,9 227 57 RTD Data Error * * * RTD data inconsistency error 313
227 74 330
227 75 331
227 76 332
227 77 333
227 78 334
227 79 335
227 106 ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * * Block SEF Stage 1 time delay 362
227 107 ISEF>2 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 2 time delay 363
227 108 ISEF>3 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 3 time delay 364
227 109 ISEF>4 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 4 time delay 365
227 130 Reset Relays/LED * * * Reset Latched Relays & LED’s 386
227 131 Reset Lockout * * * Reset Lockout Opto Input 387
227 132 Reset All Values * * * Reset CB Maintenance Values 388
227 133 Reset I2 Thermal * * Reset NPS Thermal State 389
IEC60870-5-103 Monitor
1 9, 11 224 20 Monitor Blocked * * * * 391
Blocking
IEC60870-5-103 Command
1 9, 11 227 136 Command Blocked * * * * 392
Blocking
2 1,7 227 163 Gen Diff Trip A * Generator Differential Trip A 419
2 1,7 227 164 Gen Diff Trip B * Generator Differential Trip B 420
2 1,7 227 165 Gen Diff Trip C * Generator Differential Trip C 421
2 1,7 227 166 Field Fail1 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 1 Trip 422
2 1,7 227 167 Field Fail2 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 2 Trip 423
2 1,7 227 185 V Shift Trip * Voltage vector shift trip 441
2 1,7 224 92 IN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage EF Trip 442
2 1,7 224 93 IN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage EF Trip 443
2 1,7 227 188 IN>3 Trip * 3rd Stage EF Trip 444
2 1,7 227 189 IN>4 Trip * 4th Stage EF Trip 445
2 1,7 227 190 IREF> Trip * * * REF Trip 446
2 1,7 227 191 ISEF>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage SEF Trip 447
2 1,7 227 192 ISEF>2 Trip * 2nd Stage SEF Trip 448
2 1,7 227 193 ISEF>3 Trip * 3rd Stage SEF Trip 449
2 1,7 227 194 ISEF>4 Trip * 4th Stage SEF Trip 450
2 1,7 227 195 VN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 451
2 1,7 227 196 VN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 452
2 1,7 227 197 V<1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 453
2 1,7 227 205 V>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 461
2 1,7 227 213 F<1 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 1 trip 469
2 1,7 227 214 F<2 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 2 trip 470
2 1,7 227 215 F<3 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 3 trip 471
2 1,7 227 216 F<4 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 4 trip 472
2 1,7 227 217 F>1 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 1 Trip 473
2 1,7 227 218 F>2 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 2 Trip 474
2 1,7 227 219 Power1 Trip * * * Power stage 1 trip 475
2 1,7 227 220 Power2 Trip * * * Power stage 2 trip 476
2 1,7 224 90 I>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477
2 1,7 224 69 I>1 Trip A * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478
2 1,7 224 70 I>1 Trip B * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479
2 1,7 224 71 I>1 Trip C * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480
2 1,7 224 91 I>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481
2 1,7 227 226 I>2 Trip A * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482
2 1,7 227 227 I>2 Trip B * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483
2 1,7 227 228 I>2 Trip C * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484
2 1,7 227 229 I>3 Trip * 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485
2 1,7 227 230 I>3 Trip A * 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486
2 1,7 227 231 I>3 Trip B * 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487
2 1,7 227 232 I>3 Trip C * 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488
2 1,7 227 233 I>4 Trip * 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489
2 1,7 227 234 I>4 Trip A * 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490
2 1,7 227 235 I>4 Trip B * 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491
2 1,7 227 236 I>4 Trip C * 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492
2 1,7 227 237 Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * * tBF1 Trip 3Ph 493
2 1,7 227 238 Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * * tBF2 Trip 3Ph 494
2 1,7 227 243 Thermal O/L Trip * * * Thermal Overload Trip 499
2 1,7 227 252 CL Input 1 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 1 Trip 508
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 127 V Dep OC Start * * * 639
Overcurrent Start
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 128 V Dep OC Start A * * * 640
Overcurrent Start A
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 129 V Dep OC Start B * * * 641
Overcurrent Start B
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 130 V Dep OC Start C * * * 642
Overcurrent Start C
Superimposed Ia over
229 4 VTS IA delta> * * * 772
threshold
Superimposed Ib over
229 5 VTS IB delta> * * * 773
threshold
Superimposed Ic over
229 6 VTS IC delta> * * * 774
threshold
229 9 BFail SEF Trip * * * CBF current Prot SEF Trip 777
229 10 BFail Non I Trip * * * CBF Non Current Prot Trip 778
229 11 Freq High * * * Freq High 779
229 12 Freq Low * * * Freq Low 780
229 13 Freq Not found * * * Freq Not found 781
229 14 Stop Freq Track * * * Stop Freq Track 782
1 1,7 229 15 Recon LOM-1 * Reconnect LOM (unqualified) 783
Reconnect Disable
1 1,7 229 16 Recon Disable-1 * 784
(unqualified)
1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the
Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0 within P340 MiCOM relays.
The MiCOM P340 uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code
Library version 2.31.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP
Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate
with P340 relays with the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition
Level 2. It also contains many Subset Level 3 and above features.
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Vendor Name: ALSTOM T&D Ltd – Energy Automation and Information
Device Name: MiCOM P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: • P341****4*0070*
• P342****4*0070*
• P343****4*0070*
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 ¨ Master
For Responses: Level 2 þ Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels
supported (the complete list is described in the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table):
• For static (non-change event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00
and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are
supported in addition to the request qualifier code 06 (no range (all
points)).
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01.
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with
qualifiers 17 or 28.
• For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
• 16-bit and 32-bit analog change events with time may be requested.
• The read function code for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1 is
supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received: 292 Received: 249
Maximum Data Link Retries: Maximum Application Layer Retries:
¨ None þ None
þ Fixed at 2 ¨ Configurable
¨ Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
þ Never ¨ Never
¨ Always ¨ Always
¨ Sometimes þ When reporting event data
¨ Configurable þ When sending multi-fragment
responses
¨ Sometimes
¨ Configurable
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database
3. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported
by the P340 in both request and response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Object Request Response
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 1 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time
07, 08 (limited qty)
2 2 Binary Input Change with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
(default – 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event without Time
07, 08 (limited qty)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event without Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event with Time
07, 08 (limited qty)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event with Time
07, 08 (limited qty)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
(qty = 1)
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Notes:
1. A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is
requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
2. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded
when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static
object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded
with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.)
4. POINT LIST
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by
this implementation of DNP 3.0.
4.1 Binary input points
The Binary Input objects (1 & 2) provide read-only access to a sub-set of the P340’s
digital data bus (DDB).
By default, all the static object (object 1) points belong to the Class 0 data set. The
default allocation of the points in the change-event object (object 2) to a change-
event class (1, 2, 3) is indicated in the point-list table below. The MiCOM S1 setting
support software may be used to alter both of these assignments. However,
deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of removing the point from the
point-list of objects 1 & 2 and renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point
indices are contiguous.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
102 128 150 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 465 2 False
103 129 151 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 466 2 False
104 130 152 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 467 2 False
105 131 153 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 468 2 False
106 132 154 Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip 469 2 False
107 133 155 Under Frequency Stage 2 Trip 470 2 False
108 134 156 Under Frequency Stage 3 Trip 471 2 False
109 135 157 Under Frequency Stage 4 Trip 472 2 False
110 136 158 Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip 473 2 False
111 137 159 Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip 474 2 False
112 138 160 Power Stage 1 Trip 475 2 False
113 139 161 Power Stage 2 Trip 476 2 False
114 140 162 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477 2 False
115 141 163 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478 2 False
116 142 164 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479 2 False
117 143 165 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480 2 False
118 144 166 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481 2 False
119 145 167 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482 2 False
120 146 168 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483 2 False
121 147 169 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484 2 False
122 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485 2 False
123 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486 2 False
124 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487 2 False
125 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488 2 False
126 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489 2 False
127 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490 2 False
128 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491 2 False
129 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492 2 False
130 148 170 tBF1 Trip 3ph 493 2 False
131 149 171 tBF2 Trip 3ph 494 2 False
132 150 172 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip 495 2 False
133 151 173 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip 496 2 False
174 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip 497 2 False
175 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip 498 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
160 186 210 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 601 2 False
161 187 211 2nd Stage O/C Start A 602 2 False
162 188 212 2nd Stage O/C Start B 603 2 False
163 189 213 2nd Stage O/C Start C 604 2 False
164 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 605 2 False
165 3rd Stage O/C Start A 606 2 False
166 3rd Stage O/C Start B 607 2 False
167 3rd Stage O/C Start C 608 2 False
168 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 609 2 False
169 4th Stage O/C Start A 610 2 False
170 4th Stage O/C Start B 611 2 False
171 4th Stage O/C Start C 612 2 False
172 190 214 1st Stage EF Start 613 2 False
173 191 215 2nd Stage EF Start 614 2 False
174 3rd Stage EF Start 615 2 False
175 4th Stage EF Start 616 2 False
176 192 216 1st Stage SEF Start 617 2 False
177 2nd Stage SEF Start 618 2 False
178 3rd Stage SEF Start 619 2 False
179 4th Stage SEF Start 620 2 False
217 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 621 2 False
180 193 218 Under Frequency Stage 1 Start 622 2 False
181 194 219 Under Frequency Stage 2 Start 623 2 False
182 195 220 Under Frequency Stage 3 Start 624 2 False
183 196 221 Under Frequency Stage 4 Start 625 2 False
184 197 222 Over Frequency Stage 1 Start 626 2 False
185 198 223 Over Frequency Stage 2 Start 627 2 False
186 I> Blocked O/C Start 628 2 False
187 IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start 629 2 False
188 Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start 630 2 False
199 224 Volts per Hz Start 636 2 False
200 225 Field Failure Stage 1 Start 637 2 False
201 226 Field Failure Stage 2 Start 638 2 False
202 227 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start 3Ph 639 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Start Signals
236 258 288 Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start 658 2 False
237 259 289 Current Loop Input 2 Alarm Start 659 2 False
238 260 290 Current Loop Input 3 Alarm Start 660 2 False
239 261 291 Current Loop Input 4 Alarm Start 661 2 False
240 262 292 Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start 662 2 False
241 263 293 Current Loop Input 2 Trip Start 663 2 False
242 264 294 Current Loop Input 3 Trip Start 664 2 False
243 265 295 Current Loop Input 4 Trip Start 665 2 False
4.2 Binary output status points and control relay output block
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12).
Binary Output Status points are included in Class 0 data set. (Since there is not a
change-event object for the binary outputs, the binary output points are not part of
the class 1, 2, or 3 data sets). It is not possible to configure the class 0 membership
of this object with MiCOM S1.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
The Control Relay Output Block (CROB) implementation is compliant with the DNP
technical bulletin TB2000-006, which rescinds CROB behaviours specified in the
original four document set and addendum sub-set documents.
The following text is a brief summary of DNP technical bulletin TB2000-006:
Each control point in the CROB may be either a "complimentary control function" or a
"single function".
Examples of complimentary control functions are:
• Trip and close
• On and Off
There is no significance to these codes; they do the same thing. Each of the
permitted single-function codes must perform the same function on a given single-
function point index.
The original DNP 3.0 specification for the CROB "exposes the details of the device
hardware to the protocol stack. This is unnecessary and creates interoperability
issues". Moreover, "some IED vendors have implemented points that do different
things based on the control code that is sent. " E.g. a point latches for the latch codes
and pulses for the pulse codes. "This perverts the original intent of the CROB and
makes it impossible for masters that statically configure control codes to be
interoperable with such [IEDs]. This type of implementation is also not transportable
across legacy protocol boundaries."
In the following table, point indices that are marked as “unpaired” will accept the
correspondingly marked control codes and treat them identically as a “trigger” for the
command action associated with the point. Unpaired points do not have a state
value that can be read and a read request, whilst completing successfully, will always
return a value of zero.
Points that are marked as “paired” behave as complimentary-controls and have a
state value that can be read. The Latch On and Pulse On/Close control-codes set the
specified output status point whilst the Latch Off and Pulse On/Trip codes reset it.
The Count field is not supported and must be either zero or one. The On-time, and
Off-time fields are ignored. The Queue and Clear bits in the Control-Code field are
not supported and must be zero. The “Pulse Off” control-code code is not supported.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Pulse On/Close
Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343
Unpaired
Latch Off
Latch On
Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description
Paired
Index Index Index
Pulse On/Close
Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343
Unpaired
Latch Off
Latch On
Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description
Paired
Index Index Index
26 26 26 Control Input 12 * * * * *
27 27 27 Control Input 13 * * * * *
28 28 28 Control Input 14 * * * * *
29 29 29 Control Input 15 * * * * *
30 30 30 Control Input 16 * * * * *
31 31 31 Control Input 17 * * * * *
32 32 32 Control Input 18 * * * * *
33 33 33 Control Input 19 * * * * *
34 34 34 Control Input 20 * * * * *
35 35 35 Control Input 21 * * * * *
36 36 36 Control Input 22 * * * * *
37 37 37 Control Input 23 * * * * *
38 38 38 Control Input 24 * * * * *
39 39 39 Control Input 25 * * * * *
40 40 40 Control Input 26 * * * * *
41 41 41 Control Input 27 * * * * *
42 42 42 Control Input 28 * * * * *
43 43 43 Control Input 29 * * * * *
44 44 44 Control Input 30 * * * * *
45 45 45 Control Input 31 * * * * *
46 46 46 Control Input 32 * * * * *
4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters
(Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the
frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
By default the Binary Counters (object 20) and Frozen Counters (object 21) are
included in class 0 polls. The MiCOM S1 setting support software may be used to
alter both of these assignments. (Since there is not a change-event object for the
Binary Counters or Frozen Counters, the counter points are not part of the class 1, 2,
or 3 data sets). However, deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of
removing the point from the point-list of the associated object (20 or 21) and
renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point indices are contiguous.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Moreover, if a point is deselected from the running counter object (20) then it is also
deselected from the frozen counter object (21).
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)
Active Group
0 0 0 Active Group D9 1…4 1 3
Measurements 1
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)
33 33 33 V1 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
34 34 34 V2 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
35 35 35 V0 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
47 47 47 B Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
48 48 48 C Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
49 49 49 3 Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)
Measurements 3
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)
4.5
Standard
Data Change Change Event Change Event Change Event
Name/Description Scaling Numeric Range Units
Type Event Deadband MIN Deadband MAX Deadband STEP
Deadband
D1 Standard Phase, RMS, & Sequence Current x In / 500 0.1 0.05 In 64 In 0.01 In 0.000…65.534 A
Page 156/170
D3 Voltage x Vn /(110 x 100) 5 0.1 Vn / 110 220 Vn / 110 0.1 Vn / 110 0.00…220.00 V
D6 Power x 0.1In x Vn / 110 1 0.1In .Vn / 110 3200 In x Vn / 110 0.1In x Vn / 110 -3150.0…+3150.0 W/VAr/VA
D10 Energy x In x Vn / 110 n/a In x Vn / 110 32000 In x Vn / 110 In x Vn / 110 0…231-1 Wh/VArh/VAh
D11 Admittance (Standard Current) x ( In / 1000)( 110 / Vn) 0.1 (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) 32 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) -7.040…+7.040 S
D12 Admittance (Sensitive Current) x ( In / 10000)( 110 / Vn) 0.01 (0.001 In)( 110 / 2 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.001 In)( 110 / Vn) -0.0220…+0.0220 S
Vn)
D13 Time (Minutes) x 0.01 5 1 30 0.5 0.00…327.67 Min
D16 CLIO Input Value x 0.1 10 0.1 9999 0.1 -9999.9…+9999.9 [User]
Notes:
1. In and Vn are the relay input ratings: 1A or 5A and 110V or 440V respectively.
2. The scaling value represents the multiplier required for the master station to scale the value obtained from the relay to the relay’s secondary (i.e. input) terms. Additional scaling will be
required by the master station to obtain primary quantities.
3. Type D6 can represent Watts, VArs or VA, the exact unit applied depends on the description of the item.
4. The default change event deadband is used unless specified otherwise in the point list.
5. All quantities are presented to the relay’s internal DNP3 interface as signed 32-bit values. Use of the 16-bit variations will require an assessment on a point by point basis as to whether the
value should be treated as signed or unsigned. The specified numeric range for each point can be used as a good guide to making this decision.
Relay Menu Database
6. The “D16” units are defined by the user, depending on the type of CLIO transducer connected.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
1
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436 &
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip 1
DDB #496
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
Field Fail Alarm
DDB #309
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
RTD Thermal Alm
DDB #310
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298 0
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321 1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308
1
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
1
F<3 Trip Freq Prot Alm
DDB #471 DDB #315
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases
100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446 0
1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
0
1 Straight
0
R7 V or F Trip
DDB #006
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064
DDB #446
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
1 Latching LED 3
DDB #066
NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
1 Latching LED 6
DDB #069
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
SPower1 Trip
1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
DDB #495
Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #446
1 Dwell
0
R1 Trip CB
DDB #000
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
1
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
&
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip
1
DDB #496
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases
IN>1 Trip
1 Dwell
0
R2 Trip PrimeMov
DDB #001
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
PSlipz Z1 Trip
DDB #497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
DDB #498
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308
Field Fail Alarm 0
DDB #309
RTD Thermal Alm
1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
DDB #310
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
F<3 Trip
DDB #471 1
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
Freq Prot Alm
DDB #315
V<1 Trip
DDB #453
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
1 Voltage Prot Alm
DDB #316
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip 0
DDB #446
1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465 0
1 Straight
0
R7 Volt Trip
DDB #006
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
0
1 Straight
0
R8 Freq Trip
DDB #007
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
0
Gen Diff Trip R9 Diff Trip
DDB #418 Straight DDB #008
0
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
0
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500 1 Straight R10 SysBack Trip
DDB #009
0
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
0
NPS Trip R11 NPS Trip
DDB #424 Straight DDB #010
0
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
0
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower1 Trip
1 Straight
0
R13 Power Trip
DDB #012
DDB #495
SPower2 Trip
DDB #496 0
V/Hz Trip R14 V/Hz Trip
DDB #429 Straight DDB #013
0
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064
DDB #446
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Non -
1 Latching
LED 6
DDB #069
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343
EXTERNAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/36
P2139ENc
P2192ena
Figure 2: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator Using VEE Connected
VT's (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/36
P2193ena
Figure 3: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator with Sensitive Power
(8 I/P & 7 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 4/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2194ena
Figure 4: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/36
P2195ena
Figure 5: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 6/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1357ena
Figure 6: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/36
P2196ena
Figure 7: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 15 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 8/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2197ena
Figure 8: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 7 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/36
P2198ena
Figure 9: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (12 I/P & 11 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 10/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1358ena
Figure 10: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/36
P1359ena
Figure 11: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 12/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2201ena
Figure 12: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (24 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/36
P2202ena
Figure 13: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 14/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2203ena
Figure 14: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 14 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/36
P2204ena
Figure 15: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P & RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 16/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2205ena
Figure 16: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/36
P2206ena
Figure 17: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 18/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2207ena
Figure 18: Generator Protection Relay with Biased Differential Using VEE Connected VT’s
and Sensitive Power (16 I/P & 14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/36
P1360ena
Figure 19: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 14 O/P &
CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 20/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2208ena
Figure 20: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/36
P2209ena
Figure 21: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 22 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 22/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1361ena
Figure 22: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/36
P1362ena
Figure 23: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 24/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P2212ena
Figure 24: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (32 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/36
P2213ena
Figure 25: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 32 O/P &
RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 26/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1363ena
Figure 26: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (32 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/36
P1364ena
Figure 27: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 32 O/P &
RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 28/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1366ena
Figure 28: Assembly P341/2 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/36
P1367ena
Figure 29: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with Optional
RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 30/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1370ena
Figure 30: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 16 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/36
P1369ena
Figure 31: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 16 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 32/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1365ena
Figure 32: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/36
P1368ena
Figure 33: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 34/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1371ena
Figure 34: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (24 I/P & 24 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/36
P1372ena
Figure 35: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (24 I/P & 24 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 36/36 MiCOM P342, P343
P1373ena
Figure 36: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (32 I/P & 16 O/P & RTD &
CLIO or 16 I/P & 32 O/P & RTD & CLIO)
Hardware/Software Version P34x/EN VC/E33
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343
Page 1/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 2/16
Page 3/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 4/16
Page 5/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 6/16
1(C) A/B Jan 2002 ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Recorder
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build only
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance
Recorder
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS
requests
ü Enhancements to IEC60870-5-103 build to include
05 private codes, monitor blocking and disturbance record
D A/B Feb 2002 extraction. New uncompressed disturbance recorder for V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Cont.
IEC60870-5-103 build only
ü Correction to Courier NPS thermal reset command
ü Correction to IEC60870-5-103 voltage measurements
for Vn=380/480V relays
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to foreign language text for System Backup
E A/B Mar 2002 protection not included in previous 05 software builds V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Enhanced DNP 3.0 Object 10 support for Pulse
On/Close control points
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version
Page 7/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 8/16
Page 9/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Page 10/16
Page 11/16
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
01 ü ü ü ü û û û
Page 12/16
02 û ü ü ü û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33
03 û û ü ü û û û
04 û û û ü û û û
05 û û û û ü û û
06 û û û û û ü ü
07 û û û û û û ü
01 ü ü ü ü û û û
02 û ü ü ü û û û
03 û û ü ü û û û
MiCOM P342, P343
04 û û û ü û û û
05 û û û û ü ü ü
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version
06 û û û û ü ü ü
07 û û û û û û ü
Page 13/16
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05A-E 05F 06 07
01 ü û û û û û û û
Page 14/16
02 û ü û û û û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33
03 û û ü û û û û û
04 û û û ü û û û û
05A-E û û û û ü û û û
05F û û û û û ü û û
06 û û û û û û ü û
07 û û û û û û û ü
1
Menu text remains compatible within each software version (except 05) but is NOT compatible across different versions.
Hardware/Software Version P34x /EN VC/E33
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/16
Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3
In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2
Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8
Product Specific
Size 40TE Case, No Option (8 Optos + 7 Relays) A
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + RTD B
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 40TE Case, 16 Optos + 7 Relays* D
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 15 Relays* E
Size 40TE Case, 12 Optos + 11 Relays* F
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays* G
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* H
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + CLIO* J
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays* K
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays* L
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD + CLIO* M
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* N
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* P
Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4
Mounting
Panel Mounting A
Software XX
Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1
Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C
A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)
Note Mounting
For rack mounting assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
P34x/EN VC/E33 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 16/16 MiCOM P342, P343
Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3
In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2
Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8
Product Specific
Size 60TE Case, No Option (16 Optos + 14 Relays) A
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + RTD B
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 14 Relays* D
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 22 Relays* E
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays* F
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* G
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + CLIO* H
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays* J
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays* K
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD + CLIO* L
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* M
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays + RTD* N
Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4
Mounting
Panel Mounting A
Rack Mounting (Size 80TE case only)* B
Software XX
Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1
Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C
A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)
Note Mounting
For rack mounting in the 60TE case size assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
Publication: P34x/EN T/F33